1 | %% |
---|
2 | %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a |
---|
3 | %% |
---|
4 | %% |
---|
5 | %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of |
---|
6 | %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and |
---|
7 | %% conferences. |
---|
8 | %% |
---|
9 | %% Support sites: |
---|
10 | %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ |
---|
11 | %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ |
---|
12 | %% and |
---|
13 | %% http://www.ieee.org/ |
---|
14 | %% |
---|
15 | %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes |
---|
16 | %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. |
---|
17 | %% |
---|
18 | %% |
---|
19 | %% Contributors: |
---|
20 | %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), |
---|
21 | %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), |
---|
22 | %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) |
---|
23 | %% |
---|
24 | %% |
---|
25 | %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, |
---|
26 | %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, |
---|
27 | %% Juergen von Hagen |
---|
28 | %% and |
---|
29 | %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell |
---|
30 | %% |
---|
31 | %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell |
---|
32 | %% See: |
---|
33 | %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ |
---|
34 | %% for current contact information. |
---|
35 | %% |
---|
36 | %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
---|
37 | %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command |
---|
38 | %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. |
---|
39 | %% |
---|
40 | %%************************************************************************* |
---|
41 | %% Legal Notice: |
---|
42 | %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or |
---|
43 | %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or |
---|
44 | %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! |
---|
45 | %% User assumes all risk. |
---|
46 | %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for |
---|
47 | %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, |
---|
48 | %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse |
---|
49 | %% of any information contained here. |
---|
50 | %% |
---|
51 | %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not |
---|
52 | %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. |
---|
53 | %% |
---|
54 | %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) |
---|
55 | %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, |
---|
56 | %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included |
---|
57 | %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released |
---|
58 | %% 2003/12/01 or later. |
---|
59 | %% Retain all contribution notices and credits. |
---|
60 | %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** |
---|
61 | %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** |
---|
62 | %% |
---|
63 | %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, |
---|
64 | %% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex |
---|
65 | %% |
---|
66 | %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an |
---|
67 | %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will |
---|
68 | %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. |
---|
69 | %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version |
---|
70 | %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". |
---|
71 | %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, |
---|
72 | %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the |
---|
73 | %% correct version information. |
---|
74 | %% The changes should also be documented via source comments. |
---|
75 | %%************************************************************************* |
---|
76 | %% |
---|
77 | % |
---|
78 | % Available class options |
---|
79 | % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} |
---|
80 | % |
---|
81 | % *** choose only one from each category *** |
---|
82 | % |
---|
83 | % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt |
---|
84 | % Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. |
---|
85 | % |
---|
86 | % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca |
---|
87 | % determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, |
---|
88 | % correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user |
---|
89 | % should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like |
---|
90 | % journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for |
---|
91 | % anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is |
---|
92 | % repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review |
---|
93 | % papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will |
---|
94 | % automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the |
---|
95 | % cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are |
---|
96 | % not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like |
---|
97 | % peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted |
---|
98 | % as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact |
---|
99 | % information can be easily seen on the cover page. |
---|
100 | % The default is journal. |
---|
101 | % |
---|
102 | % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final |
---|
103 | % determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for |
---|
104 | % handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. |
---|
105 | % draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX |
---|
106 | % packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows |
---|
107 | % for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like |
---|
108 | % draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot |
---|
109 | % of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably |
---|
110 | % also want to select onecolumn. |
---|
111 | % The default is final. |
---|
112 | % |
---|
113 | % letterpaper, a4paper |
---|
114 | % determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER |
---|
115 | % SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS |
---|
116 | % WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will |
---|
117 | % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer |
---|
118 | % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top |
---|
119 | % margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. |
---|
120 | % For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) |
---|
121 | % paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing |
---|
122 | % (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. |
---|
123 | % Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. |
---|
124 | % IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex |
---|
125 | % (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more |
---|
126 | % important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for |
---|
127 | % dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the |
---|
128 | % testflow documentation |
---|
129 | % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow |
---|
130 | % for more details on dvips paper size configuration. |
---|
131 | % The default is letterpaper. |
---|
132 | % |
---|
133 | % oneside, twoside |
---|
134 | % determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) |
---|
135 | % printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of |
---|
136 | % the pages. |
---|
137 | % The default is oneside. |
---|
138 | % |
---|
139 | % onecolumn, twocolumn |
---|
140 | % determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One |
---|
141 | % column mode is usually used only with draft papers. |
---|
142 | % The default is twocolumn. |
---|
143 | % |
---|
144 | % compsoc |
---|
145 | % Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. |
---|
146 | % |
---|
147 | % romanappendices |
---|
148 | % Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls |
---|
149 | % now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what |
---|
150 | % v1.6b and earlier did. |
---|
151 | % |
---|
152 | % captionsoff |
---|
153 | % disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals |
---|
154 | % request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages |
---|
155 | % of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat |
---|
156 | % package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. |
---|
157 | % |
---|
158 | % nofonttune |
---|
159 | % turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those |
---|
160 | % not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" |
---|
161 | % their fonts. |
---|
162 | % The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. |
---|
163 | % |
---|
164 | % |
---|
165 | %---------- |
---|
166 | % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): |
---|
167 | % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch |
---|
168 | % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin |
---|
169 | % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin |
---|
170 | % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin |
---|
171 | % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin |
---|
172 | % |
---|
173 | % Available CLASSINFOs provided: |
---|
174 | % \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) |
---|
175 | % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) |
---|
176 | % \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) |
---|
177 | % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) |
---|
178 | % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) |
---|
179 | % |
---|
180 | % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: |
---|
181 | % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, |
---|
182 | % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
---|
183 | % point size options provided as a single macro: |
---|
184 | % \CLASSOPTIONpt |
---|
185 | % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's |
---|
186 | % normalsize point size. |
---|
187 | % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview |
---|
188 | % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls |
---|
189 | |
---|
190 | |
---|
191 | |
---|
192 | |
---|
193 | |
---|
194 | \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell] |
---|
195 | \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} |
---|
196 | \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} |
---|
197 | \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} |
---|
198 | |
---|
199 | % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 |
---|
200 | % These values serve as a way a .tex file can |
---|
201 | % determine if the new features are provided. |
---|
202 | % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from |
---|
203 | % these values. i.e., V1.4 |
---|
204 | % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- |
---|
205 | % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) |
---|
206 | \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} |
---|
207 | \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} |
---|
208 | |
---|
209 | % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls |
---|
210 | \newif\if@restonecol |
---|
211 | \newif\if@titlepage |
---|
212 | |
---|
213 | |
---|
214 | % class option conditionals |
---|
215 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse |
---|
216 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue |
---|
217 | |
---|
218 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue |
---|
219 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse |
---|
220 | |
---|
221 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue |
---|
222 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse |
---|
223 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
---|
224 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse |
---|
225 | |
---|
226 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse |
---|
227 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
---|
228 | |
---|
229 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue |
---|
230 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse |
---|
231 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse |
---|
232 | |
---|
233 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse |
---|
234 | |
---|
235 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse |
---|
236 | |
---|
237 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse |
---|
238 | |
---|
239 | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse |
---|
240 | |
---|
241 | |
---|
242 | % class info conditionals |
---|
243 | |
---|
244 | % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output |
---|
245 | \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse |
---|
246 | |
---|
247 | |
---|
248 | % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper |
---|
249 | \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
---|
250 | |
---|
251 | |
---|
252 | |
---|
253 | % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers |
---|
254 | % dimen |
---|
255 | \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
---|
256 | \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB |
---|
257 | % count |
---|
258 | \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
---|
259 | \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
---|
260 | % token list |
---|
261 | \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
---|
262 | |
---|
263 | % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) |
---|
264 | % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some |
---|
265 | % external packages |
---|
266 | \def\@ptsize{0} |
---|
267 | % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt |
---|
268 | \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
---|
269 | \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
---|
270 | \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} |
---|
271 | \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} |
---|
272 | |
---|
273 | |
---|
274 | |
---|
275 | \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% |
---|
276 | \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% |
---|
277 | \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
---|
278 | \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% |
---|
279 | \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% |
---|
280 | \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} |
---|
281 | |
---|
282 | |
---|
283 | \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% |
---|
284 | \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% |
---|
285 | \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue |
---|
286 | \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% |
---|
287 | \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% |
---|
288 | \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} |
---|
289 | |
---|
290 | \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse |
---|
291 | \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} |
---|
292 | \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue |
---|
293 | \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} |
---|
294 | |
---|
295 | \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} |
---|
296 | \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} |
---|
297 | |
---|
298 | % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages |
---|
299 | % will go into draft mode. |
---|
300 | \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
---|
301 | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
---|
302 | % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages |
---|
303 | % used by the document. |
---|
304 | \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
---|
305 | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
---|
306 | % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. |
---|
307 | \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
---|
308 | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} |
---|
309 | \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
---|
310 | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
---|
311 | |
---|
312 | \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
---|
313 | \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
---|
314 | |
---|
315 | \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
---|
316 | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
---|
317 | |
---|
318 | \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
---|
319 | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} |
---|
320 | |
---|
321 | \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
---|
322 | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
---|
323 | |
---|
324 | \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue |
---|
325 | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
---|
326 | |
---|
327 | \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} |
---|
328 | |
---|
329 | \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} |
---|
330 | |
---|
331 | \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} |
---|
332 | |
---|
333 | \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} |
---|
334 | |
---|
335 | |
---|
336 | % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal |
---|
337 | \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} |
---|
338 | % overrride these defaults per user requests |
---|
339 | \ProcessOptions |
---|
340 | |
---|
341 | |
---|
342 | |
---|
343 | % Computer Society conditional execution command |
---|
344 | \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
---|
345 | % inverse |
---|
346 | \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
---|
347 | % compsoc conference |
---|
348 | \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
---|
349 | % compsoc not conference |
---|
350 | \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
---|
351 | |
---|
352 | |
---|
353 | % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. |
---|
354 | % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. |
---|
355 | \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} |
---|
356 | \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} |
---|
357 | \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} |
---|
358 | |
---|
359 | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} |
---|
360 | |
---|
361 | % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, |
---|
362 | % not Times Roman. |
---|
363 | \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} |
---|
364 | |
---|
365 | % enable Times/Palatino main text font |
---|
366 | \normalfont\selectfont |
---|
367 | |
---|
368 | |
---|
369 | |
---|
370 | |
---|
371 | |
---|
372 | % V1.7 conference notice message hook |
---|
373 | \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% |
---|
374 | \typeout{** Conference Paper **}% |
---|
375 | \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% |
---|
376 | \typeout{}% |
---|
377 | \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% |
---|
378 | \typeout{ of your paper;}% |
---|
379 | \typeout{}% |
---|
380 | \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% |
---|
381 | \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% |
---|
382 | \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% |
---|
383 | \typeout{}} |
---|
384 | |
---|
385 | |
---|
386 | % we can send console reminder messages to the user here |
---|
387 | \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} |
---|
388 | |
---|
389 | |
---|
390 | % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode |
---|
391 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% |
---|
392 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% |
---|
393 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% |
---|
394 | \fi% |
---|
395 | \fi |
---|
396 | |
---|
397 | |
---|
398 | % V1.7 improved paper size setting code. |
---|
399 | % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that |
---|
400 | % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, |
---|
401 | % even if only effect is to set them to \relax. |
---|
402 | % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special |
---|
403 | {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% |
---|
404 | % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax |
---|
405 | % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput |
---|
406 | % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. |
---|
407 | \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth |
---|
408 | \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% |
---|
409 | % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special |
---|
410 | \ifcase\pdfoutput |
---|
411 | \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% |
---|
412 | \else |
---|
413 | % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag |
---|
414 | \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue |
---|
415 | \fi}} |
---|
416 | |
---|
417 | % let the user know the selected papersize |
---|
418 | \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space |
---|
419 | (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} |
---|
420 | |
---|
421 | \ifCLASSINFOpdf |
---|
422 | \typeout{-- Using PDF output.} |
---|
423 | \else |
---|
424 | \typeout{-- Using DVI output.} |
---|
425 | \fi |
---|
426 | |
---|
427 | |
---|
428 | % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} |
---|
429 | % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, |
---|
430 | % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. |
---|
431 | % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as |
---|
432 | % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues |
---|
433 | % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. |
---|
434 | % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. |
---|
435 | %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} |
---|
436 | %\def\@journal{} |
---|
437 | |
---|
438 | |
---|
439 | |
---|
440 | % pointsize values |
---|
441 | % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size |
---|
442 | \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} |
---|
443 | \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} |
---|
444 | \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} |
---|
445 | \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} |
---|
446 | |
---|
447 | |
---|
448 | |
---|
449 | % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) |
---|
450 | % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and |
---|
451 | % revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems |
---|
452 | % on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want |
---|
453 | % normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) |
---|
454 | % 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) |
---|
455 | % 10pt 58 12pt (exact) |
---|
456 | % 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) |
---|
457 | % 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) |
---|
458 | % |
---|
459 | |
---|
460 | % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size |
---|
461 | % in case baselinestretch ever changes. |
---|
462 | % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink |
---|
463 | \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
---|
464 | \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip |
---|
465 | |
---|
466 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
---|
467 | \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} |
---|
468 | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% |
---|
469 | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% |
---|
470 | \normalsize |
---|
471 | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% |
---|
472 | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
---|
473 | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% |
---|
474 | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt |
---|
475 | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} |
---|
476 | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
---|
477 | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
---|
478 | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
---|
479 | % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt |
---|
480 | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} |
---|
481 | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} |
---|
482 | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} |
---|
483 | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} |
---|
484 | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} |
---|
485 | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} |
---|
486 | \fi |
---|
487 | |
---|
488 | |
---|
489 | % Check if we have selected 10 points |
---|
490 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten |
---|
491 | \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} |
---|
492 | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}% |
---|
493 | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% |
---|
494 | \normalsize |
---|
495 | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% |
---|
496 | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
---|
497 | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% |
---|
498 | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt |
---|
499 | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} |
---|
500 | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
---|
501 | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
---|
502 | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
---|
503 | % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt |
---|
504 | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} |
---|
505 | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
---|
506 | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
---|
507 | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
---|
508 | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
---|
509 | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
---|
510 | \fi |
---|
511 | |
---|
512 | |
---|
513 | % Check if we have selected 11 points |
---|
514 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven |
---|
515 | \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} |
---|
516 | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% |
---|
517 | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% |
---|
518 | \normalsize |
---|
519 | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% |
---|
520 | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
---|
521 | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% |
---|
522 | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt |
---|
523 | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
---|
524 | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
---|
525 | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
---|
526 | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
---|
527 | % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt |
---|
528 | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} |
---|
529 | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
---|
530 | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
---|
531 | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
---|
532 | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
---|
533 | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
---|
534 | \fi |
---|
535 | |
---|
536 | |
---|
537 | % Check if we have selected 12 points |
---|
538 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve |
---|
539 | \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} |
---|
540 | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% |
---|
541 | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% |
---|
542 | \normalsize |
---|
543 | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% |
---|
544 | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
---|
545 | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% |
---|
546 | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt |
---|
547 | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
---|
548 | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
---|
549 | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
---|
550 | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
---|
551 | % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt |
---|
552 | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} |
---|
553 | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} |
---|
554 | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} |
---|
555 | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} |
---|
556 | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} |
---|
557 | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
---|
558 | \fi |
---|
559 | |
---|
560 | |
---|
561 | % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for |
---|
562 | % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution |
---|
563 | % tolerance to turn off this warning |
---|
564 | \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} |
---|
565 | % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. |
---|
566 | |
---|
567 | |
---|
568 | % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with |
---|
569 | % technote |
---|
570 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
---|
571 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% |
---|
572 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% |
---|
573 | \fi% |
---|
574 | \fi |
---|
575 | |
---|
576 | |
---|
577 | % V1.7 |
---|
578 | % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with |
---|
579 | % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use |
---|
580 | % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. |
---|
581 | \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family |
---|
582 | \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family |
---|
583 | \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family |
---|
584 | \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family |
---|
585 | \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family |
---|
586 | \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode |
---|
587 | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else |
---|
588 | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else |
---|
589 | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
---|
590 | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
---|
591 | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else |
---|
592 | \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} |
---|
593 | |
---|
594 | |
---|
595 | |
---|
596 | |
---|
597 | % set the default \baselinestretch |
---|
598 | \def\baselinestretch{1} |
---|
599 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
600 | \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes |
---|
601 | \fi |
---|
602 | |
---|
603 | |
---|
604 | % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch |
---|
605 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined |
---|
606 | \else |
---|
607 | \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override |
---|
608 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to |
---|
609 | \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
---|
610 | \fi |
---|
611 | |
---|
612 | \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect |
---|
613 | |
---|
614 | |
---|
615 | |
---|
616 | |
---|
617 | % store the normalsize baselineskip |
---|
618 | \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip |
---|
619 | \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax |
---|
620 | % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip |
---|
621 | % we could save a register by giving the user access to |
---|
622 | % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect |
---|
623 | % its read only internal status |
---|
624 | \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
---|
625 | \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax |
---|
626 | % store the nominal value of jot |
---|
627 | \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot |
---|
628 | \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax |
---|
629 | |
---|
630 | % set \jot |
---|
631 | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax |
---|
632 | |
---|
633 | |
---|
634 | |
---|
635 | |
---|
636 | % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing |
---|
637 | % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a |
---|
638 | % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) |
---|
639 | % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. |
---|
640 | % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: |
---|
641 | % |
---|
642 | % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt |
---|
643 | % |
---|
644 | % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need |
---|
645 | % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE |
---|
646 | % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. |
---|
647 | % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: |
---|
648 | % 35% nominal |
---|
649 | % 23% minimum |
---|
650 | % 50% maximum |
---|
651 | % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) |
---|
652 | % |
---|
653 | % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: |
---|
654 | % 37.5% nominal |
---|
655 | % 23% minimum |
---|
656 | % 55% maximum |
---|
657 | |
---|
658 | % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use |
---|
659 | % for medium (normal weight) |
---|
660 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} |
---|
661 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} |
---|
662 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} |
---|
663 | |
---|
664 | % for bold |
---|
665 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} |
---|
666 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} |
---|
667 | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} |
---|
668 | |
---|
669 | |
---|
670 | % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: |
---|
671 | % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space |
---|
672 | % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch |
---|
673 | % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink |
---|
674 | % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands |
---|
675 | % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes |
---|
676 | \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% |
---|
677 | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. |
---|
678 | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
---|
679 | \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
---|
680 | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
---|
681 | \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
---|
682 | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
---|
683 | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
---|
684 | \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} |
---|
685 | |
---|
686 | % revise the interword spacing for each font weight |
---|
687 | \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
---|
688 | \mdseries |
---|
689 | \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% |
---|
690 | \bfseries |
---|
691 | \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% |
---|
692 | }} |
---|
693 | |
---|
694 | % revise the interword spacing for each font shape |
---|
695 | % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are |
---|
696 | % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we |
---|
697 | % won't alter these either. |
---|
698 | \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
---|
699 | \normalfont |
---|
700 | \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
701 | \normalfont\itshape |
---|
702 | \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
703 | }} |
---|
704 | |
---|
705 | % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape |
---|
706 | % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a |
---|
707 | % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. |
---|
708 | \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily |
---|
709 | \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
710 | \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
711 | \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
712 | \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
713 | \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
714 | \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
715 | \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
716 | \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
717 | \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
---|
718 | \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} |
---|
719 | |
---|
720 | % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing |
---|
721 | % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make |
---|
722 | % sure all the default fonts are loaded |
---|
723 | \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else |
---|
724 | \@IEEEtunefonts |
---|
725 | \fi |
---|
726 | |
---|
727 | % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts |
---|
728 | \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} |
---|
729 | |
---|
730 | |
---|
731 | |
---|
732 | % V1.6 |
---|
733 | % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations |
---|
734 | % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise |
---|
735 | % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox |
---|
736 | % warning. The author may still have to tweak things, |
---|
737 | % but the appearance will be much better "right out |
---|
738 | % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. |
---|
739 | % TeX default is 50 |
---|
740 | \hyphenpenalty=750 |
---|
741 | % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. |
---|
742 | % The TeX default is 1000 |
---|
743 | \hbadness=1350 |
---|
744 | % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation |
---|
745 | \frenchspacing |
---|
746 | |
---|
747 | % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks |
---|
748 | \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 |
---|
749 | \relpenalty=800 % default 500 |
---|
750 | |
---|
751 | |
---|
752 | % margin note stuff |
---|
753 | \marginparsep 10pt |
---|
754 | \marginparwidth 20pt |
---|
755 | \marginparpush 25pt |
---|
756 | |
---|
757 | |
---|
758 | % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch |
---|
759 | \lineskip 0pt |
---|
760 | \normallineskip 0pt |
---|
761 | \lineskiplimit 0pt |
---|
762 | \normallineskiplimit 0pt |
---|
763 | |
---|
764 | % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the |
---|
765 | % footline |
---|
766 | \footskip 0.4in |
---|
767 | |
---|
768 | % normally zero, should be relative to font height. |
---|
769 | % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) |
---|
770 | \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex |
---|
771 | |
---|
772 | \parindent 1.0em |
---|
773 | |
---|
774 | \topmargin -49.0pt |
---|
775 | \headheight 12pt |
---|
776 | \headsep 0.25in |
---|
777 | |
---|
778 | % use the normal font baselineskip |
---|
779 | % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch |
---|
780 | \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
---|
781 | \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt |
---|
782 | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
---|
783 | % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used |
---|
784 | % to determine these values. |
---|
785 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page |
---|
786 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
---|
787 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page |
---|
788 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
---|
789 | |
---|
790 | |
---|
791 | \columnsep 1pc |
---|
792 | \textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc |
---|
793 | |
---|
794 | |
---|
795 | % the default side margins are equal |
---|
796 | \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
---|
797 | \oddsidemargin 14.32mm |
---|
798 | \evensidemargin 14.32mm |
---|
799 | \else |
---|
800 | \oddsidemargin 0.680in |
---|
801 | \evensidemargin 0.680in |
---|
802 | \fi |
---|
803 | % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
---|
804 | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
805 | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
806 | |
---|
807 | |
---|
808 | |
---|
809 | % adjust margins for conference mode |
---|
810 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
811 | \topmargin -0.25in |
---|
812 | % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
---|
813 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
---|
814 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
---|
815 | \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) |
---|
816 | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
---|
817 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page |
---|
818 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page |
---|
819 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
---|
820 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
---|
821 | \fi |
---|
822 | |
---|
823 | |
---|
824 | % compsoc conference |
---|
825 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
826 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
827 | % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep |
---|
828 | \columnsep 0.375in |
---|
829 | % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin |
---|
830 | \topmargin 0in |
---|
831 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff |
---|
832 | % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
---|
833 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
---|
834 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
---|
835 | \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) |
---|
836 | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
---|
837 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
---|
838 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page |
---|
839 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
---|
840 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page |
---|
841 | \textwidth 6.5in |
---|
842 | % the default side margins are equal |
---|
843 | \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
---|
844 | \oddsidemargin 22.45mm |
---|
845 | \evensidemargin 22.45mm |
---|
846 | \else |
---|
847 | \oddsidemargin 1in |
---|
848 | \evensidemargin 1in |
---|
849 | \fi |
---|
850 | % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
---|
851 | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
852 | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
853 | \fi\fi |
---|
854 | |
---|
855 | |
---|
856 | |
---|
857 | % draft mode settings override that of all other modes |
---|
858 | % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra |
---|
859 | % space between the lines for editor's comments |
---|
860 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
861 | % want 1in from top of paper to text |
---|
862 | \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% |
---|
863 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% |
---|
864 | % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type |
---|
865 | \oddsidemargin 0in |
---|
866 | \evensidemargin 0in |
---|
867 | % set the text width |
---|
868 | \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% |
---|
869 | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% |
---|
870 | \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% |
---|
871 | \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% |
---|
872 | % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. |
---|
873 | % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad |
---|
874 | \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% |
---|
875 | \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% |
---|
876 | \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% |
---|
877 | \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% |
---|
878 | \fi |
---|
879 | |
---|
880 | |
---|
881 | |
---|
882 | % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin |
---|
883 | % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. |
---|
884 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
885 | \else |
---|
886 | \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
887 | \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
---|
888 | \fi |
---|
889 | \fi |
---|
890 | |
---|
891 | \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
892 | \else |
---|
893 | % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. |
---|
894 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
895 | \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
---|
896 | \fi |
---|
897 | \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
---|
898 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside |
---|
899 | \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
---|
900 | \else |
---|
901 | \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
---|
902 | \fi |
---|
903 | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
904 | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
---|
905 | \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} |
---|
906 | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
---|
907 | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
---|
908 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and |
---|
909 | outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
---|
910 | \fi |
---|
911 | |
---|
912 | |
---|
913 | |
---|
914 | % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin |
---|
915 | % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin |
---|
916 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
917 | \else |
---|
918 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
919 | \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
---|
920 | \fi |
---|
921 | \fi |
---|
922 | |
---|
923 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
924 | \else |
---|
925 | % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin |
---|
926 | \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
---|
927 | \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
---|
928 | \fi |
---|
929 | \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
---|
930 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} |
---|
931 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
---|
932 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
---|
933 | \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} |
---|
934 | \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
---|
935 | \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
---|
936 | % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip |
---|
937 | % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need |
---|
938 | % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will |
---|
939 | % correct for both. |
---|
940 | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} |
---|
941 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and |
---|
942 | bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
---|
943 | \fi |
---|
944 | |
---|
945 | |
---|
946 | |
---|
947 | |
---|
948 | |
---|
949 | |
---|
950 | |
---|
951 | % LIST SPACING CONTROLS |
---|
952 | |
---|
953 | % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing |
---|
954 | % above and below \trivlist |
---|
955 | % Both \list and IED lists override this. |
---|
956 | % However, \trivlist will use this as will most |
---|
957 | % things built from \trivlist like the \center |
---|
958 | % environment. |
---|
959 | \topsep 0.5\baselineskip |
---|
960 | |
---|
961 | % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded |
---|
962 | % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase |
---|
963 | % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. |
---|
964 | % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. |
---|
965 | \partopsep \z@ |
---|
966 | |
---|
967 | % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. |
---|
968 | % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs |
---|
969 | % so this is also zero. |
---|
970 | % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to |
---|
971 | % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). |
---|
972 | \parsep \z@ |
---|
973 | |
---|
974 | % Controls the extra spacing between list items. |
---|
975 | % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. |
---|
976 | % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect |
---|
977 | % lists (but not IED lists). |
---|
978 | \itemsep \z@ |
---|
979 | |
---|
980 | % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list |
---|
981 | % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter |
---|
982 | % it, you have to do so when you call the \list. |
---|
983 | % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment |
---|
984 | % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below |
---|
985 | \itemindent -1em |
---|
986 | |
---|
987 | % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to |
---|
988 | % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. |
---|
989 | % Hence this statement does nothing for lists. |
---|
990 | % But, quote and verse do use it for indention. |
---|
991 | \leftmargin 2em |
---|
992 | |
---|
993 | % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list |
---|
994 | % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and |
---|
995 | % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they |
---|
996 | % all are overridden. |
---|
997 | \leftmargini 2em |
---|
998 | %\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. |
---|
999 | %\leftmargini 0em |
---|
1000 | \leftmarginii 1em |
---|
1001 | \leftmarginiii 1.5em |
---|
1002 | \leftmarginiv 1.5em |
---|
1003 | \leftmarginv 1.0em |
---|
1004 | \leftmarginvi 1.0em |
---|
1005 | \labelsep 0.5em |
---|
1006 | \labelwidth \z@ |
---|
1007 | |
---|
1008 | |
---|
1009 | % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. |
---|
1010 | % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the |
---|
1011 | % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the |
---|
1012 | % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). |
---|
1013 | % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around |
---|
1014 | % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. |
---|
1015 | % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in |
---|
1016 | % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes |
---|
1017 | % of these values DO affect \list |
---|
1018 | % |
---|
1019 | \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} |
---|
1020 | \let\@listI\@listi |
---|
1021 | \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% |
---|
1022 | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
---|
1023 | \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% |
---|
1024 | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
---|
1025 | \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% |
---|
1026 | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
---|
1027 | \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% |
---|
1028 | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
---|
1029 | \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% |
---|
1030 | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
---|
1031 | |
---|
1032 | |
---|
1033 | % IEEE uses 5) not 5. |
---|
1034 | \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} |
---|
1035 | |
---|
1036 | % IEEE uses a) not (a) |
---|
1037 | \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} |
---|
1038 | |
---|
1039 | % IEEE uses iii) not iii. |
---|
1040 | \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} |
---|
1041 | |
---|
1042 | % IEEE uses A) not A. |
---|
1043 | \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} |
---|
1044 | |
---|
1045 | % exactly the same as in article.cls |
---|
1046 | \def\p@enumii{\theenumi} |
---|
1047 | \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} |
---|
1048 | \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} |
---|
1049 | |
---|
1050 | % itemized list label styles |
---|
1051 | \def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} |
---|
1052 | \def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} |
---|
1053 | \def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} |
---|
1054 | \def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} |
---|
1055 | |
---|
1056 | |
---|
1057 | |
---|
1058 | % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** |
---|
1059 | % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls |
---|
1060 | % *************************** |
---|
1061 | % |
---|
1062 | % |
---|
1063 | % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by |
---|
1064 | % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right |
---|
1065 | % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal |
---|
1066 | % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use |
---|
1067 | % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications |
---|
1068 | % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. |
---|
1069 | % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose |
---|
1070 | % which one you like in your document using a command such as: |
---|
1071 | % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} |
---|
1072 | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA |
---|
1073 | \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent |
---|
1074 | |
---|
1075 | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB |
---|
1076 | \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent |
---|
1077 | % However, we'll default to using \parindent |
---|
1078 | % which makes more sense to me |
---|
1079 | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent |
---|
1080 | \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA |
---|
1081 | |
---|
1082 | |
---|
1083 | % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels |
---|
1084 | % are indented to the right. |
---|
1085 | % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
---|
1086 | \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent |
---|
1087 | \IEEEelabelindent \parindent |
---|
1088 | |
---|
1089 | % This controls the default amount the description list labels |
---|
1090 | % are indented to the right. |
---|
1091 | % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
---|
1092 | \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent |
---|
1093 | \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent |
---|
1094 | |
---|
1095 | % This is the value actually used within the IED lists. |
---|
1096 | % The IED environments automatically set its value to |
---|
1097 | % one of the three values above, so global changes do |
---|
1098 | % not have any effect |
---|
1099 | \newdimen\IEEElabelindent |
---|
1100 | \IEEElabelindent \parindent |
---|
1101 | |
---|
1102 | % The actual amount labels will be indented is |
---|
1103 | % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below |
---|
1104 | % corresponding to the level of nesting depth |
---|
1105 | % This provides a means by which the user can |
---|
1106 | % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper |
---|
1107 | % levels |
---|
1108 | % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" |
---|
1109 | % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific |
---|
1110 | % circumstances. |
---|
1111 | % The first list level almost always has full indention. |
---|
1112 | % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation |
---|
1113 | % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing |
---|
1114 | % that they don't use any indentation. |
---|
1115 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one |
---|
1116 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases |
---|
1117 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? |
---|
1118 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} |
---|
1119 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} |
---|
1120 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} |
---|
1121 | |
---|
1122 | % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto |
---|
1123 | % set to one of the 6 values above |
---|
1124 | % global changes here have no effect |
---|
1125 | \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} |
---|
1126 | |
---|
1127 | % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
---|
1128 | % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for |
---|
1129 | % the labels. |
---|
1130 | \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep |
---|
1131 | \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em |
---|
1132 | |
---|
1133 | % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
---|
1134 | % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for |
---|
1135 | % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the |
---|
1136 | % spacing in these cases |
---|
1137 | \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep |
---|
1138 | \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em |
---|
1139 | |
---|
1140 | % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and |
---|
1141 | % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing |
---|
1142 | % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. |
---|
1143 | \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep |
---|
1144 | \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt |
---|
1145 | |
---|
1146 | |
---|
1147 | % This command is executed within each IED list environment |
---|
1148 | % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the |
---|
1149 | % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing |
---|
1150 | % global parameters that affect things other than lists. |
---|
1151 | % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} |
---|
1152 | % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until |
---|
1153 | % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. |
---|
1154 | \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} |
---|
1155 | |
---|
1156 | % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based |
---|
1157 | % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent |
---|
1158 | % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} |
---|
1159 | % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: |
---|
1160 | % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep |
---|
1161 | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
---|
1162 | \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% |
---|
1163 | \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% |
---|
1164 | \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} |
---|
1165 | |
---|
1166 | % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the |
---|
1167 | % width of the given text. It is the same as |
---|
1168 | % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} |
---|
1169 | % and useful as a shorter alternative. |
---|
1170 | % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width |
---|
1171 | % of the longest label in the list |
---|
1172 | \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} |
---|
1173 | |
---|
1174 | % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the |
---|
1175 | % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal |
---|
1176 | % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via |
---|
1177 | % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
---|
1178 | % environments. |
---|
1179 | \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} |
---|
1180 | |
---|
1181 | % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically |
---|
1182 | % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep |
---|
1183 | % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin |
---|
1184 | % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) |
---|
1185 | % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
---|
1186 | % environments to have an effect. |
---|
1187 | \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin |
---|
1188 | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse |
---|
1189 | |
---|
1190 | % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by |
---|
1191 | % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. |
---|
1192 | % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option |
---|
1193 | % of the IED list environments to have an effect. |
---|
1194 | \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor |
---|
1195 | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse |
---|
1196 | |
---|
1197 | |
---|
1198 | % internal variable to indicate type of IED label |
---|
1199 | % justification |
---|
1200 | % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right |
---|
1201 | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} |
---|
1202 | |
---|
1203 | |
---|
1204 | % commands to allow the user to control IED |
---|
1205 | % label justifications. Use these commands within |
---|
1206 | % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl |
---|
1207 | % Note that changing the normal list justifications |
---|
1208 | % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! |
---|
1209 | % I include these commands as they may be helpful to |
---|
1210 | % those who are using these enhanced list controls for |
---|
1211 | % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. |
---|
1212 | % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right |
---|
1213 | % justification, description defaults to left. |
---|
1214 | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left |
---|
1215 | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center |
---|
1216 | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right |
---|
1217 | |
---|
1218 | |
---|
1219 | |
---|
1220 | |
---|
1221 | % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies |
---|
1222 | % this allows us to set all the list parameters within |
---|
1223 | % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) |
---|
1224 | % from overriding any of our parameters |
---|
1225 | % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers |
---|
1226 | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
---|
1227 | \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% |
---|
1228 | \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% |
---|
1229 | \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% |
---|
1230 | \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% |
---|
1231 | \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% |
---|
1232 | \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% |
---|
1233 | \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% |
---|
1234 | \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% |
---|
1235 | \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% |
---|
1236 | \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} |
---|
1237 | |
---|
1238 | % Note controlled spacing here |
---|
1239 | \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% |
---|
1240 | \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% |
---|
1241 | \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% |
---|
1242 | \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% |
---|
1243 | \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% |
---|
1244 | \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% |
---|
1245 | \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% |
---|
1246 | \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% |
---|
1247 | \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% |
---|
1248 | \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} |
---|
1249 | |
---|
1250 | |
---|
1251 | % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments |
---|
1252 | % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description |
---|
1253 | % which must be created by the base classes |
---|
1254 | % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate |
---|
1255 | \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize |
---|
1256 | \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize |
---|
1257 | \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate |
---|
1258 | \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate |
---|
1259 | |
---|
1260 | % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls |
---|
1261 | \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} |
---|
1262 | {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin |
---|
1263 | \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} |
---|
1264 | {\endlist} |
---|
1265 | \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep |
---|
1266 | \normalfont\bfseries #1} |
---|
1267 | |
---|
1268 | |
---|
1269 | % override LaTeX's default IED lists |
---|
1270 | \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
---|
1271 | \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
---|
1272 | \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
---|
1273 | \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
---|
1274 | \def\description{\@IEEEdescription} |
---|
1275 | \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
---|
1276 | |
---|
1277 | % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that |
---|
1278 | % override itemize, enumerate, or description |
---|
1279 | \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
---|
1280 | \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
---|
1281 | \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
---|
1282 | \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
---|
1283 | \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} |
---|
1284 | \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
---|
1285 | |
---|
1286 | |
---|
1287 | % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal |
---|
1288 | % commands so they are protected against redefinition |
---|
1289 | \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} |
---|
1290 | \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} |
---|
1291 | \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} |
---|
1292 | \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} |
---|
1293 | \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} |
---|
1294 | \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} |
---|
1295 | |
---|
1296 | |
---|
1297 | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
---|
1298 | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
---|
1299 | % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 |
---|
1300 | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
---|
1301 | \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% |
---|
1302 | \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
---|
1303 | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
---|
1304 | \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% |
---|
1305 | \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% |
---|
1306 | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
---|
1307 | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
---|
1308 | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
---|
1309 | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
---|
1310 | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
---|
1311 | % set other defaults |
---|
1312 | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
---|
1313 | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
---|
1314 | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
---|
1315 | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% |
---|
1316 | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
---|
1317 | \partopsep 0ex% |
---|
1318 | \parsep 0ex% |
---|
1319 | \itemsep 0ex% |
---|
1320 | \rightmargin 0em% |
---|
1321 | \listparindent 0em% |
---|
1322 | \itemindent 0em% |
---|
1323 | % calculate the label width |
---|
1324 | % the user can override this later if |
---|
1325 | % they specified a \labelwidth |
---|
1326 | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% |
---|
1327 | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
---|
1328 | \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% |
---|
1329 | \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
---|
1330 | % to our globals |
---|
1331 | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
---|
1332 | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
---|
1333 | #1\relax% |
---|
1334 | % If the user has requested not to use the |
---|
1335 | % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent |
---|
1336 | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
---|
1337 | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% |
---|
1338 | \fi% |
---|
1339 | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
---|
1340 | % calculate our left margin based |
---|
1341 | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
---|
1342 | % \labelsep |
---|
1343 | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
---|
1344 | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
---|
1345 | \fi}\fi\fi}% |
---|
1346 | |
---|
1347 | |
---|
1348 | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
---|
1349 | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
---|
1350 | % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 |
---|
1351 | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
---|
1352 | \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% |
---|
1353 | \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
---|
1354 | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
---|
1355 | \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% |
---|
1356 | \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% |
---|
1357 | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
---|
1358 | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
---|
1359 | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
---|
1360 | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
---|
1361 | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
---|
1362 | % set other defaults |
---|
1363 | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
---|
1364 | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
---|
1365 | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
---|
1366 | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% |
---|
1367 | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
---|
1368 | \partopsep 0ex% |
---|
1369 | \parsep 0ex% |
---|
1370 | \itemsep 0ex% |
---|
1371 | \rightmargin 0em% |
---|
1372 | \listparindent 0em% |
---|
1373 | \itemindent 0em% |
---|
1374 | % calculate the label width |
---|
1375 | % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using |
---|
1376 | % normalfont 1) to 9) |
---|
1377 | % The user can override this later |
---|
1378 | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% |
---|
1379 | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
---|
1380 | \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% |
---|
1381 | \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
---|
1382 | % to our globals |
---|
1383 | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
---|
1384 | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
---|
1385 | #1\relax% |
---|
1386 | % If the user has requested not to use the |
---|
1387 | % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
---|
1388 | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
---|
1389 | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
---|
1390 | \fi% |
---|
1391 | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
---|
1392 | % calculate our left margin based |
---|
1393 | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
---|
1394 | % \labelsep |
---|
1395 | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
---|
1396 | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
---|
1397 | \fi}\fi\fi}% |
---|
1398 | |
---|
1399 | |
---|
1400 | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
---|
1401 | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
---|
1402 | % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 |
---|
1403 | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
---|
1404 | \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% |
---|
1405 | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
---|
1406 | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
---|
1407 | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
---|
1408 | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
---|
1409 | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
---|
1410 | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default |
---|
1411 | % set other defaults |
---|
1412 | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
---|
1413 | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
---|
1414 | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
---|
1415 | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% |
---|
1416 | % assume normal labelsep |
---|
1417 | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
---|
1418 | \partopsep 0ex% |
---|
1419 | \parsep 0ex% |
---|
1420 | \itemsep 0ex% |
---|
1421 | \rightmargin 0em% |
---|
1422 | \listparindent 0em% |
---|
1423 | \itemindent 0em% |
---|
1424 | % Bogus label width in case the user forgets |
---|
1425 | % to set it. |
---|
1426 | % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you |
---|
1427 | % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to |
---|
1428 | % display it on the screen during compilation |
---|
1429 | % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out |
---|
1430 | % which label is the widest) |
---|
1431 | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% |
---|
1432 | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
---|
1433 | \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
---|
1434 | % to our globals |
---|
1435 | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
---|
1436 | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
---|
1437 | #1\relax% |
---|
1438 | % If the user has requested not to use the |
---|
1439 | % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
---|
1440 | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
---|
1441 | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
---|
1442 | \fi% |
---|
1443 | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
---|
1444 | % calculate our left margin based |
---|
1445 | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
---|
1446 | % \labelsep |
---|
1447 | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
---|
1448 | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% |
---|
1449 | \fi}\fi} |
---|
1450 | |
---|
1451 | % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. |
---|
1452 | \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax |
---|
1453 | \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else |
---|
1454 | \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax |
---|
1455 | \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else |
---|
1456 | \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} |
---|
1457 | |
---|
1458 | |
---|
1459 | % VERSE and QUOTE |
---|
1460 | % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment |
---|
1461 | \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr |
---|
1462 | \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent |
---|
1463 | \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} |
---|
1464 | {\endlist} |
---|
1465 | \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent |
---|
1466 | \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} |
---|
1467 | {\endlist} |
---|
1468 | \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} |
---|
1469 | {\endlist} |
---|
1470 | |
---|
1471 | |
---|
1472 | % \titlepage |
---|
1473 | % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct |
---|
1474 | % way to create the title page. |
---|
1475 | \newif\if@restonecol |
---|
1476 | \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn |
---|
1477 | \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} |
---|
1478 | \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} |
---|
1479 | |
---|
1480 | % standard values from article.cls |
---|
1481 | \arraycolsep 5pt |
---|
1482 | \arrayrulewidth .4pt |
---|
1483 | \doublerulesep 2pt |
---|
1484 | |
---|
1485 | \tabcolsep 6pt |
---|
1486 | \tabbingsep 0.5em |
---|
1487 | |
---|
1488 | |
---|
1489 | %% FOOTNOTES |
---|
1490 | % |
---|
1491 | %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
---|
1492 | % V1.6 respond to changes in font size |
---|
1493 | % space added above the footnotes (if present) |
---|
1494 | \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
---|
1495 | |
---|
1496 | % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes |
---|
1497 | % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in |
---|
1498 | % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep |
---|
1499 | % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed |
---|
1500 | % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since |
---|
1501 | % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip |
---|
1502 | % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to |
---|
1503 | % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing |
---|
1504 | % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad |
---|
1505 | % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps |
---|
1506 | % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran |
---|
1507 | % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. |
---|
1508 | {\footnotesize |
---|
1509 | \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} |
---|
1510 | |
---|
1511 | |
---|
1512 | \skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins |
---|
1513 | \fboxsep = 3pt |
---|
1514 | \fboxrule = .4pt |
---|
1515 | % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark |
---|
1516 | % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need |
---|
1517 | % box resizing tricks here. |
---|
1518 | \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em |
---|
1519 | % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks |
---|
1520 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1521 | \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} |
---|
1522 | \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} |
---|
1523 | \fi |
---|
1524 | |
---|
1525 | % IEEE does not use footnote rules |
---|
1526 | \def\footnoterule{} |
---|
1527 | |
---|
1528 | % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" |
---|
1529 | % system to implement this. |
---|
1530 | \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
---|
1531 | \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
---|
1532 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1533 | \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
---|
1534 | \kern-5pt |
---|
1535 | \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} |
---|
1536 | \kern4.6pt |
---|
1537 | \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
---|
1538 | \else |
---|
1539 | \relax |
---|
1540 | \fi} |
---|
1541 | \fi |
---|
1542 | |
---|
1543 | % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages |
---|
1544 | \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 |
---|
1545 | |
---|
1546 | % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations |
---|
1547 | % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, |
---|
1548 | % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. |
---|
1549 | \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 |
---|
1550 | |
---|
1551 | % default allows section depth up to /paragraph |
---|
1552 | \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} |
---|
1553 | |
---|
1554 | % technotes do not allow /paragraph |
---|
1555 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
---|
1556 | \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} |
---|
1557 | \fi |
---|
1558 | % neither do compsoc conferences |
---|
1559 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} |
---|
1560 | |
---|
1561 | |
---|
1562 | \newcounter{section} |
---|
1563 | \newcounter{subsection}[section] |
---|
1564 | \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] |
---|
1565 | \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] |
---|
1566 | |
---|
1567 | % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may |
---|
1568 | % have their own, different, implementations |
---|
1569 | \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] |
---|
1570 | |
---|
1571 | % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents |
---|
1572 | \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 |
---|
1573 | \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) |
---|
1574 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1575 | % compsoc is all arabic |
---|
1576 | \def\thesection{\arabic{section}} |
---|
1577 | \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} |
---|
1578 | \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
---|
1579 | \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} |
---|
1580 | \else |
---|
1581 | \def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I |
---|
1582 | % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - |
---|
1583 | \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A |
---|
1584 | % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 |
---|
1585 | \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 |
---|
1586 | \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a |
---|
1587 | \fi |
---|
1588 | |
---|
1589 | % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to |
---|
1590 | % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. |
---|
1591 | % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but |
---|
1592 | % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. |
---|
1593 | \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% |
---|
1594 | \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} |
---|
1595 | |
---|
1596 | |
---|
1597 | % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) |
---|
1598 | % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes |
---|
1599 | % in the former to automatically appear in the latter |
---|
1600 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1601 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
---|
1602 | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} |
---|
1603 | \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} |
---|
1604 | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} |
---|
1605 | \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} |
---|
1606 | \else% compsoc not conferencs |
---|
1607 | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} |
---|
1608 | \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} |
---|
1609 | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
---|
1610 | \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} |
---|
1611 | \fi |
---|
1612 | \else% not compsoc |
---|
1613 | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. |
---|
1614 | \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. |
---|
1615 | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) |
---|
1616 | \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) |
---|
1617 | \fi |
---|
1618 | |
---|
1619 | % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum |
---|
1620 | \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) |
---|
1621 | % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray |
---|
1622 | \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) |
---|
1623 | % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on |
---|
1624 | % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis |
---|
1625 | \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} |
---|
1626 | |
---|
1627 | |
---|
1628 | |
---|
1629 | % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does |
---|
1630 | \def\contentsname{Contents} |
---|
1631 | \def\listfigurename{List of Figures} |
---|
1632 | \def\listtablename{List of Tables} |
---|
1633 | \def\refname{References} |
---|
1634 | \def\indexname{Index} |
---|
1635 | \def\figurename{Fig.} |
---|
1636 | \def\tablename{TABLE} |
---|
1637 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} |
---|
1638 | \def\partname{Part} |
---|
1639 | \def\appendixname{Appendix} |
---|
1640 | \def\abstractname{Abstract} |
---|
1641 | % IEEE specific names |
---|
1642 | \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms} |
---|
1643 | \def\IEEEproofname{Proof} |
---|
1644 | |
---|
1645 | |
---|
1646 | % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS |
---|
1647 | % |
---|
1648 | \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} |
---|
1649 | \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} |
---|
1650 | \def\@dotsep{4.5} |
---|
1651 | \setcounter{tocdepth}{3} |
---|
1652 | |
---|
1653 | % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily |
---|
1654 | % collide with the section titles. |
---|
1655 | % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. |
---|
1656 | % MDS 1/2001 |
---|
1657 | \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} |
---|
1658 | \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% |
---|
1659 | \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% |
---|
1660 | \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% |
---|
1661 | \endgroup} |
---|
1662 | % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep |
---|
1663 | \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} |
---|
1664 | \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} |
---|
1665 | % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth |
---|
1666 | % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents |
---|
1667 | % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! |
---|
1668 | \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} |
---|
1669 | \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} |
---|
1670 | \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} |
---|
1671 | \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} |
---|
1672 | \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} |
---|
1673 | \let\l@table\l@figure |
---|
1674 | |
---|
1675 | |
---|
1676 | %% Definitions for floats |
---|
1677 | %% |
---|
1678 | %% Normal Floats |
---|
1679 | \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
---|
1680 | \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
---|
1681 | \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil |
---|
1682 | \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
---|
1683 | \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
---|
1684 | \def\topfraction{0.9} |
---|
1685 | \def\bottomfraction{0.4} |
---|
1686 | \def\floatpagefraction{0.8} |
---|
1687 | % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page |
---|
1688 | \def\textfraction{0.1} |
---|
1689 | |
---|
1690 | %% Double Column Floats |
---|
1691 | \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
---|
1692 | |
---|
1693 | \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
---|
1694 | % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. |
---|
1695 | % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best |
---|
1696 | % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable |
---|
1697 | % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and |
---|
1698 | % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with |
---|
1699 | % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex |
---|
1700 | % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. |
---|
1701 | % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't |
---|
1702 | % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. |
---|
1703 | |
---|
1704 | \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil |
---|
1705 | \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
---|
1706 | \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
---|
1707 | \def\dbltopfraction{0.8} |
---|
1708 | \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} |
---|
1709 | \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} |
---|
1710 | |
---|
1711 | \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
---|
1712 | \setcounter{topnumber}{2} |
---|
1713 | \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} |
---|
1714 | \setcounter{totalnumber}{4} |
---|
1715 | |
---|
1716 | |
---|
1717 | |
---|
1718 | % article class provides these, we should too. |
---|
1719 | \newlength\abovecaptionskip |
---|
1720 | \newlength\belowcaptionskip |
---|
1721 | % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table |
---|
1722 | % captions |
---|
1723 | \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} |
---|
1724 | \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} |
---|
1725 | % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be |
---|
1726 | % overridden by a user |
---|
1727 | \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
---|
1728 | \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
---|
1729 | |
---|
1730 | |
---|
1731 | % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments |
---|
1732 | % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. |
---|
1733 | \def\@IEEEtablestring{table} |
---|
1734 | |
---|
1735 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1736 | % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption |
---|
1737 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
---|
1738 | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
---|
1739 | % test if is a for a figure or table |
---|
1740 | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
---|
1741 | % if a table, do table caption |
---|
1742 | \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% |
---|
1743 | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
---|
1744 | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
---|
1745 | \else |
---|
1746 | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
---|
1747 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
---|
1748 | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
---|
1749 | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
---|
1750 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
---|
1751 | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
---|
1752 | % if caption is shorter than a line, center |
---|
1753 | \else% |
---|
1754 | \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
---|
1755 | \fi\fi} |
---|
1756 | \else% nonconference compsoc |
---|
1757 | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
---|
1758 | % test if is a for a figure or table |
---|
1759 | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
---|
1760 | % if a table, do table caption |
---|
1761 | \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% |
---|
1762 | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
---|
1763 | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
---|
1764 | \else |
---|
1765 | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
---|
1766 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
---|
1767 | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
---|
1768 | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
---|
1769 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
---|
1770 | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
---|
1771 | % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify |
---|
1772 | \else% |
---|
1773 | \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
---|
1774 | \fi\fi} |
---|
1775 | \fi |
---|
1776 | |
---|
1777 | \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption |
---|
1778 | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
---|
1779 | % test if is a for a figure or table |
---|
1780 | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
---|
1781 | % if a table, do table caption |
---|
1782 | \footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}% |
---|
1783 | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
---|
1784 | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
---|
1785 | \else |
---|
1786 | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
---|
1787 | % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one |
---|
1788 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}% |
---|
1789 | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
---|
1790 | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
---|
1791 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }% |
---|
1792 | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
---|
1793 | % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise |
---|
1794 | \else% |
---|
1795 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
---|
1796 | \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
---|
1797 | \fi\fi\fi} |
---|
1798 | \fi |
---|
1799 | |
---|
1800 | |
---|
1801 | |
---|
1802 | % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label |
---|
1803 | % within \caption |
---|
1804 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
---|
1805 | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% |
---|
1806 | \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label |
---|
1807 | \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax |
---|
1808 | \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% |
---|
1809 | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% |
---|
1810 | \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave |
---|
1811 | \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} |
---|
1812 | \fi |
---|
1813 | |
---|
1814 | |
---|
1815 | % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with |
---|
1816 | % preview-latex |
---|
1817 | \newcounter{figure} |
---|
1818 | \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} |
---|
1819 | \def\fps@figure{tbp} |
---|
1820 | \def\ftype@figure{1} |
---|
1821 | \def\ext@figure{lof} |
---|
1822 | \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} |
---|
1823 | \def\figure{\@float{figure}} |
---|
1824 | \def\endfigure{\end@float} |
---|
1825 | \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} |
---|
1826 | \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} |
---|
1827 | \newcounter{table} |
---|
1828 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
1829 | \def\thetable{\arabic{table}} |
---|
1830 | \else |
---|
1831 | \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} |
---|
1832 | \fi |
---|
1833 | \def\fps@table{tbp} |
---|
1834 | \def\ftype@table{2} |
---|
1835 | \def\ext@table{lot} |
---|
1836 | \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} |
---|
1837 | % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables |
---|
1838 | % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray |
---|
1839 | \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} |
---|
1840 | \def\endtable{\end@float} |
---|
1841 | % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. |
---|
1842 | \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} |
---|
1843 | \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} |
---|
1844 | |
---|
1845 | |
---|
1846 | |
---|
1847 | |
---|
1848 | %% |
---|
1849 | %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
---|
1850 | %% |
---|
1851 | %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX |
---|
1852 | %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, |
---|
1853 | %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, |
---|
1854 | %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. |
---|
1855 | %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) |
---|
1856 | |
---|
1857 | |
---|
1858 | % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting |
---|
1859 | \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} |
---|
1860 | |
---|
1861 | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form |
---|
1862 | \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse |
---|
1863 | |
---|
1864 | \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter |
---|
1865 | % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray |
---|
1866 | % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both |
---|
1867 | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue |
---|
1868 | |
---|
1869 | \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined |
---|
1870 | \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used |
---|
1871 | |
---|
1872 | |
---|
1873 | % The default math style used by the columns |
---|
1874 | \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} |
---|
1875 | % The default text style used by the columns |
---|
1876 | % default to using the current font |
---|
1877 | \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} |
---|
1878 | |
---|
1879 | % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray |
---|
1880 | \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} |
---|
1881 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} |
---|
1882 | |
---|
1883 | % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber |
---|
1884 | % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package |
---|
1885 | % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as |
---|
1886 | % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. |
---|
1887 | \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
---|
1888 | \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
---|
1889 | \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} |
---|
1890 | |
---|
1891 | |
---|
1892 | \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% |
---|
1893 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray |
---|
1894 | \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% |
---|
1895 | \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} |
---|
1896 | |
---|
1897 | % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation |
---|
1898 | \newif\if@IEEEissubequation% |
---|
1899 | \@IEEEissubequationfalse |
---|
1900 | |
---|
1901 | % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers |
---|
1902 | \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} |
---|
1903 | |
---|
1904 | % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments |
---|
1905 | % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the |
---|
1906 | % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox |
---|
1907 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} |
---|
1908 | \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% |
---|
1909 | % check if column is defined |
---|
1910 | \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
---|
1911 | \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
1912 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% |
---|
1913 | \else% if not, error and use default type |
---|
1914 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak |
---|
1915 | Using a default centering column instead}% |
---|
1916 | {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
---|
1917 | \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
1918 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% |
---|
1919 | \fi% |
---|
1920 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
1921 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} |
---|
1922 | |
---|
1923 | % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray |
---|
1924 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} |
---|
1925 | |
---|
1926 | |
---|
1927 | % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type |
---|
1928 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} |
---|
1929 | \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% |
---|
1930 | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% |
---|
1931 | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} |
---|
1932 | |
---|
1933 | |
---|
1934 | % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types |
---|
1935 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} |
---|
1936 | \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% |
---|
1937 | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} |
---|
1938 | |
---|
1939 | |
---|
1940 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types |
---|
1941 | |
---|
1942 | |
---|
1943 | % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list |
---|
1944 | % used to build up the \halign preamble |
---|
1945 | \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% |
---|
1946 | \@@IEEEappendtoksA} |
---|
1947 | |
---|
1948 | % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument |
---|
1949 | % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register |
---|
1950 | \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% |
---|
1951 | \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% |
---|
1952 | \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} |
---|
1953 | |
---|
1954 | % define some common column types for the user |
---|
1955 | % math |
---|
1956 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
---|
1957 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
---|
1958 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} |
---|
1959 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
---|
1960 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
---|
1961 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} |
---|
1962 | % text |
---|
1963 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
---|
1964 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
---|
1965 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} |
---|
1966 | |
---|
1967 | % vertical rules |
---|
1968 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
---|
1969 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
---|
1970 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
---|
1971 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% |
---|
1972 | {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
---|
1973 | |
---|
1974 | % horizontal rules |
---|
1975 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} |
---|
1976 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} |
---|
1977 | |
---|
1978 | % plain |
---|
1979 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} |
---|
1980 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} |
---|
1981 | |
---|
1982 | % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined |
---|
1983 | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
---|
1984 | |
---|
1985 | |
---|
1986 | % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) |
---|
1987 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} |
---|
1988 | % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) |
---|
1989 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} |
---|
1990 | |
---|
1991 | % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column |
---|
1992 | % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox |
---|
1993 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue |
---|
1994 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue |
---|
1995 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
---|
1996 | |
---|
1997 | |
---|
1998 | |
---|
1999 | % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell |
---|
2000 | % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. |
---|
2001 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] |
---|
2002 | % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. |
---|
2003 | \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} |
---|
2004 | |
---|
2005 | % creates a blank separator row |
---|
2006 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] |
---|
2007 | % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
---|
2008 | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
---|
2009 | % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
---|
2010 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
---|
2011 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} |
---|
2012 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
---|
2013 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
---|
2014 | % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
---|
2015 | % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
---|
2016 | % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
---|
2017 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
---|
2018 | \else% |
---|
2019 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
---|
2020 | \fi% |
---|
2021 | \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
---|
2022 | |
---|
2023 | % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates |
---|
2024 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] |
---|
2025 | % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
---|
2026 | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
---|
2027 | % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
---|
2028 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
---|
2029 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2030 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2031 | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
---|
2032 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} |
---|
2033 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
---|
2034 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
---|
2035 | % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
---|
2036 | % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
---|
2037 | % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
---|
2038 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
---|
2039 | \else% |
---|
2040 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
---|
2041 | \fi% |
---|
2042 | \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
---|
2043 | |
---|
2044 | |
---|
2045 | |
---|
2046 | % draws a single rule across all the columns optional |
---|
2047 | % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
---|
2048 | % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts |
---|
2049 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] |
---|
2050 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
---|
2051 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2052 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2053 | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
---|
2054 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule |
---|
2055 | % turn off any struts |
---|
2056 | \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
---|
2057 | |
---|
2058 | |
---|
2059 | % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then |
---|
2060 | % another single rule row |
---|
2061 | % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
---|
2062 | % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
---|
2063 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
---|
2064 | \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
---|
2065 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2066 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2067 | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
---|
2068 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% |
---|
2069 | {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
---|
2070 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
---|
2071 | % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
---|
2072 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2073 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
---|
2074 | \else% |
---|
2075 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% |
---|
2076 | \fi% |
---|
2077 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
---|
2078 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2079 | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
---|
2080 | \else% |
---|
2081 | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% |
---|
2082 | \fi% |
---|
2083 | \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
---|
2084 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2085 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2086 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
---|
2087 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2088 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
---|
2089 | \else% |
---|
2090 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
---|
2091 | \fi% |
---|
2092 | } |
---|
2093 | |
---|
2094 | % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then |
---|
2095 | % another single rule row |
---|
2096 | % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
---|
2097 | % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
---|
2098 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
---|
2099 | \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
---|
2100 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2101 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2102 | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
---|
2103 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% |
---|
2104 | {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
---|
2105 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
---|
2106 | % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
---|
2107 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2108 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
---|
2109 | \else% |
---|
2110 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
---|
2111 | \fi% |
---|
2112 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
---|
2113 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2114 | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
---|
2115 | \else% |
---|
2116 | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% |
---|
2117 | \fi% |
---|
2118 | \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
---|
2119 | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
---|
2120 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
---|
2121 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
---|
2122 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
---|
2123 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
---|
2124 | \else% |
---|
2125 | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
---|
2126 | \fi% |
---|
2127 | } |
---|
2128 | |
---|
2129 | |
---|
2130 | |
---|
2131 | % inserts a full row's worth of &'s |
---|
2132 | % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns |
---|
2133 | % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers |
---|
2134 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% |
---|
2135 | \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
---|
2136 | \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% |
---|
2137 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
---|
2138 | \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count |
---|
2139 | \repeat% |
---|
2140 | \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s |
---|
2141 | } |
---|
2142 | |
---|
2143 | |
---|
2144 | |
---|
2145 | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines |
---|
2146 | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl |
---|
2147 | |
---|
2148 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts |
---|
2149 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} |
---|
2150 | |
---|
2151 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of |
---|
2152 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray |
---|
2153 | |
---|
2154 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height |
---|
2155 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth |
---|
2156 | |
---|
2157 | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value |
---|
2158 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used |
---|
2159 | |
---|
2160 | |
---|
2161 | |
---|
2162 | % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut |
---|
2163 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% |
---|
2164 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2165 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2166 | % remove stretchability |
---|
2167 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2168 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2169 | % save values |
---|
2170 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2171 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} |
---|
2172 | |
---|
2173 | % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut |
---|
2174 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% |
---|
2175 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% |
---|
2176 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% |
---|
2177 | % remove stretchability |
---|
2178 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2179 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2180 | % restore values |
---|
2181 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2182 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} |
---|
2183 | |
---|
2184 | |
---|
2185 | % globally restores the strut height and depth to the |
---|
2186 | % master values and sets the master strut flag to true |
---|
2187 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% |
---|
2188 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2189 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2190 | % remove stretchability |
---|
2191 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2192 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2193 | % restore values |
---|
2194 | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2195 | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2196 | \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} |
---|
2197 | |
---|
2198 | |
---|
2199 | % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current |
---|
2200 | % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth |
---|
2201 | % and the use master strut flag, global |
---|
2202 | % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried |
---|
2203 | % into the isolation/strut column |
---|
2204 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% |
---|
2205 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% |
---|
2206 | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% |
---|
2207 | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% |
---|
2208 | \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% |
---|
2209 | \fi} |
---|
2210 | |
---|
2211 | |
---|
2212 | |
---|
2213 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] |
---|
2214 | % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height |
---|
2215 | % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside |
---|
2216 | % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut |
---|
2217 | % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut |
---|
2218 | % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip |
---|
2219 | % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. |
---|
2220 | % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
---|
2221 | % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
---|
2222 | % font is used. |
---|
2223 | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
---|
2224 | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
---|
2225 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% |
---|
2226 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
---|
2227 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% |
---|
2228 | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2229 | \else% arg one present |
---|
2230 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% |
---|
2231 | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2232 | \fi% if null arg |
---|
2233 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% |
---|
2234 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
---|
2235 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% |
---|
2236 | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2237 | \else% arg two present |
---|
2238 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% |
---|
2239 | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2240 | \fi% if null arg |
---|
2241 | % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
---|
2242 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2243 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2244 | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
---|
2245 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
---|
2246 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2247 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2248 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
---|
2249 | \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
---|
2250 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2251 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2252 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2253 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2254 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
---|
2255 | \fi} |
---|
2256 | |
---|
2257 | |
---|
2258 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] |
---|
2259 | % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height |
---|
2260 | % and depth to both the master and local struts. |
---|
2261 | % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth |
---|
2262 | % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use |
---|
2263 | % of the local strut values. |
---|
2264 | % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. |
---|
2265 | % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
---|
2266 | % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
---|
2267 | % font is used. |
---|
2268 | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
---|
2269 | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
---|
2270 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% |
---|
2271 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
---|
2272 | \skip0=0pt\relax% |
---|
2273 | \else% arg one present |
---|
2274 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% |
---|
2275 | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2276 | \fi% if null arg |
---|
2277 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% |
---|
2278 | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
---|
2279 | \skip2=0pt\relax% |
---|
2280 | \else% arg two present |
---|
2281 | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% |
---|
2282 | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
---|
2283 | \fi% if null arg |
---|
2284 | % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
---|
2285 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2286 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2287 | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
---|
2288 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
---|
2289 | % get local strut size |
---|
2290 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2291 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2292 | % add it to the user supplied values |
---|
2293 | \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
---|
2294 | \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
---|
2295 | % update the local strut size |
---|
2296 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2297 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2298 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
---|
2299 | \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
---|
2300 | % get master strut size |
---|
2301 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2302 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2303 | % add it to the user supplied values |
---|
2304 | \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
---|
2305 | \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
---|
2306 | % update the local and master strut sizes |
---|
2307 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2308 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2309 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
---|
2310 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
---|
2311 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
---|
2312 | \fi} |
---|
2313 | |
---|
2314 | |
---|
2315 | % allow user a way to see the struts |
---|
2316 | \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts |
---|
2317 | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse |
---|
2318 | |
---|
2319 | % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values |
---|
2320 | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
---|
2321 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% |
---|
2322 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut |
---|
2323 | % get master strut size |
---|
2324 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2325 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2326 | \else% |
---|
2327 | % get local strut size |
---|
2328 | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
---|
2329 | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
---|
2330 | \fi% |
---|
2331 | % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
---|
2332 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2333 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2334 | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
---|
2335 | % allow user to see struts if desired |
---|
2336 | \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
---|
2337 | \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
---|
2338 | \else% |
---|
2339 | \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} |
---|
2340 | |
---|
2341 | |
---|
2342 | % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray |
---|
2343 | % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. |
---|
2344 | % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] |
---|
2345 | % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
---|
2346 | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
---|
2347 | % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 |
---|
2348 | \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} |
---|
2349 | \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} |
---|
2350 | \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
---|
2351 | \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% |
---|
2352 | \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% |
---|
2353 | \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
---|
2354 | \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
---|
2355 | \else% |
---|
2356 | \skip0=#1\relax% |
---|
2357 | \fi% |
---|
2358 | \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% |
---|
2359 | \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
---|
2360 | \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
---|
2361 | \else% |
---|
2362 | \skip2=#2\relax% |
---|
2363 | \fi% |
---|
2364 | % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
---|
2365 | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
---|
2366 | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
---|
2367 | \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
---|
2368 | \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
---|
2369 | \else% |
---|
2370 | \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} |
---|
2371 | |
---|
2372 | |
---|
2373 | % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the |
---|
2374 | % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot |
---|
2375 | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% |
---|
2376 | \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} |
---|
2377 | |
---|
2378 | |
---|
2379 | |
---|
2380 | \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} |
---|
2381 | \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
---|
2382 | |
---|
2383 | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} |
---|
2384 | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
---|
2385 | |
---|
2386 | |
---|
2387 | % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. |
---|
2388 | % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. |
---|
2389 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} |
---|
2390 | \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} |
---|
2391 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% |
---|
2392 | % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not |
---|
2393 | % the star form was involked |
---|
2394 | \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse |
---|
2395 | \else% not the star form |
---|
2396 | \global\@eqnswtrue |
---|
2397 | \fi% if star form |
---|
2398 | \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations |
---|
2399 | \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation |
---|
2400 | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign |
---|
2401 | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
---|
2402 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
---|
2403 | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
---|
2404 | % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
---|
2405 | \lineskip=0pt\relax |
---|
2406 | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax |
---|
2407 | \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
---|
2408 | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
---|
2409 | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
---|
2410 | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
---|
2411 | % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
---|
2412 | \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line |
---|
2413 | \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet |
---|
2414 | \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label |
---|
2415 | \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
---|
2416 | #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
---|
2417 | \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers |
---|
2418 | \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line |
---|
2419 | \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
---|
2420 | % put in the column for the equation number |
---|
2421 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
---|
2422 | \toks0={##}% |
---|
2423 | % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking |
---|
2424 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
---|
2425 | % add the isolation column |
---|
2426 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
---|
2427 | % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking |
---|
2428 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
---|
2429 | % add the equation number col to the preamble |
---|
2430 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% |
---|
2431 | % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col |
---|
2432 | % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
---|
2433 | \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
---|
2434 | % begin the display alignment |
---|
2435 | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
---|
2436 | $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup |
---|
2437 | % "exspand" the preamble |
---|
2438 | \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
---|
2439 | |
---|
2440 | % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use |
---|
2441 | % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, |
---|
2442 | % restore counters to correct values and exit |
---|
2443 | \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% |
---|
2444 | \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% |
---|
2445 | \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% |
---|
2446 | $$\@ignoretrue} |
---|
2447 | |
---|
2448 | % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation |
---|
2449 | \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% |
---|
2450 | \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse |
---|
2451 | |
---|
2452 | % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
---|
2453 | % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] |
---|
2454 | % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
---|
2455 | % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
---|
2456 | % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column |
---|
2457 | % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns |
---|
2458 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column |
---|
2459 | {\ifnum0=`}\fi |
---|
2460 | \@ifstar{% |
---|
2461 | \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
---|
2462 | }{% |
---|
2463 | \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
---|
2464 | }% |
---|
2465 | } |
---|
2466 | |
---|
2467 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} |
---|
2468 | |
---|
2469 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% |
---|
2470 | \ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
---|
2471 | \@@IEEEeqnarraycr |
---|
2472 | \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% |
---|
2473 | |
---|
2474 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
---|
2475 | \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column |
---|
2476 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
---|
2477 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak |
---|
2478 | environment}% |
---|
2479 | {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak |
---|
2480 | specifications.}\relax% |
---|
2481 | \else |
---|
2482 | \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
---|
2483 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
---|
2484 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
---|
2485 | \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count |
---|
2486 | \repeat |
---|
2487 | % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column |
---|
2488 | \fi |
---|
2489 | % execute the &'s |
---|
2490 | \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% |
---|
2491 | % handle the strut/isolation column |
---|
2492 | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed |
---|
2493 | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
---|
2494 | &% and enter the equation number column |
---|
2495 | % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the |
---|
2496 | % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was |
---|
2497 | \if@eqnsw% |
---|
2498 | \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% |
---|
2499 | \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% |
---|
2500 | \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter |
---|
2501 | \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% |
---|
2502 | \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% |
---|
2503 | \fi% |
---|
2504 | % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers |
---|
2505 | \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi |
---|
2506 | \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag |
---|
2507 | % reset the number of columns the user actually used |
---|
2508 | \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax |
---|
2509 | % the real end of the line |
---|
2510 | \cr} |
---|
2511 | |
---|
2512 | |
---|
2513 | |
---|
2514 | |
---|
2515 | |
---|
2516 | % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything |
---|
2517 | % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second |
---|
2518 | % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, |
---|
2519 | % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. |
---|
2520 | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox |
---|
2521 | % within an hbox. |
---|
2522 | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within |
---|
2523 | % a \hbox{$ $} construct. |
---|
2524 | % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or |
---|
2525 | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. |
---|
2526 | % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - |
---|
2527 | % natural width is the default. |
---|
2528 | % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing |
---|
2529 | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} |
---|
2530 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2531 | \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2532 | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2533 | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2534 | |
---|
2535 | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2536 | \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2537 | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2538 | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2539 | |
---|
2540 | \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
---|
2541 | \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2542 | \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2543 | |
---|
2544 | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
---|
2545 | \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2546 | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
---|
2547 | |
---|
2548 | % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} |
---|
2549 | % for \vcenter in non-math mode |
---|
2550 | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% |
---|
2551 | \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse |
---|
2552 | |
---|
2553 | \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} |
---|
2554 | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} |
---|
2555 | \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
---|
2556 | |
---|
2557 | % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs |
---|
2558 | \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign |
---|
2559 | \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values |
---|
2560 | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
---|
2561 | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
---|
2562 | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
---|
2563 | % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
---|
2564 | \lineskip=0pt\relax% |
---|
2565 | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
---|
2566 | \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
---|
2567 | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
---|
2568 | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
---|
2569 | % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox |
---|
2570 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue |
---|
2571 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue |
---|
2572 | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
---|
2573 | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
---|
2574 | % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
---|
2575 | \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
---|
2576 | #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
---|
2577 | \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing |
---|
2578 | \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
---|
2579 | % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col |
---|
2580 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
---|
2581 | \toks0={##}% |
---|
2582 | % add the isolation column to the preamble |
---|
2583 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
---|
2584 | % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
---|
2585 | \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
---|
2586 | % begin the alignment |
---|
2587 | \everycr{}% |
---|
2588 | % use only the very first token to determine the positioning |
---|
2589 | % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, |
---|
2590 | % but is probably not worth the effort |
---|
2591 | % \noindent is used as a delimiter |
---|
2592 | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
---|
2593 | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent |
---|
2594 | % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
---|
2595 | % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now |
---|
2596 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% |
---|
2597 | % use the appropriate vbox type |
---|
2598 | \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% |
---|
2599 | \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% |
---|
2600 | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
---|
2601 | \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% |
---|
2602 | \bgroup |
---|
2603 | % "exspand" the preamble |
---|
2604 | \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
---|
2605 | |
---|
2606 | % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, |
---|
2607 | % exit from math mode if needed, and exit |
---|
2608 | \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
---|
2609 | &% enter isolation/strut column |
---|
2610 | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
---|
2611 | \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values |
---|
2612 | % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray |
---|
2613 | % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) |
---|
2614 | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
---|
2615 | % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
---|
2616 | \crcr\egroup\egroup% |
---|
2617 | % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed |
---|
2618 | \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} |
---|
2619 | |
---|
2620 | |
---|
2621 | |
---|
2622 | % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
---|
2623 | % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] |
---|
2624 | % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
---|
2625 | % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ |
---|
2626 | % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
---|
2627 | % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column |
---|
2628 | % carry strut status into isolation/strut column |
---|
2629 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
---|
2630 | &% enter isolation/strut column |
---|
2631 | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
---|
2632 | % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
---|
2633 | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
---|
2634 | {\ifnum0=`}\fi% |
---|
2635 | \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} |
---|
2636 | |
---|
2637 | % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
---|
2638 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} |
---|
2639 | |
---|
2640 | % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot |
---|
2641 | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
---|
2642 | \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} |
---|
2643 | |
---|
2644 | |
---|
2645 | |
---|
2646 | % starts the halign preamble build |
---|
2647 | \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
---|
2648 | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known |
---|
2649 | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start |
---|
2650 | \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known |
---|
2651 | % ensure these are valid |
---|
2652 | \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% |
---|
2653 | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition |
---|
2654 | % currently acquired numerically referenced glue |
---|
2655 | % use a name that is easier to remember |
---|
2656 | \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
---|
2657 | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0% |
---|
2658 | % tracks number of columns in the preamble |
---|
2659 | \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% |
---|
2660 | % record the default end glues |
---|
2661 | \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% |
---|
2662 | \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% |
---|
2663 | % now parse the user's column specifications |
---|
2664 | \@@IEEEbuildpreamble} |
---|
2665 | |
---|
2666 | |
---|
2667 | % parses and builds the halign preamble |
---|
2668 | \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% |
---|
2669 | % use only the very first token to check the end |
---|
2670 | % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
---|
2671 | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
---|
2672 | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
---|
2673 | \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% |
---|
2674 | % identify current and next token type |
---|
2675 | \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid |
---|
2676 | \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next |
---|
2677 | % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def |
---|
2678 | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% |
---|
2679 | % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name |
---|
2680 | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% |
---|
2681 | % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue |
---|
2682 | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% |
---|
2683 | % process the acquired glue |
---|
2684 | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% |
---|
2685 | % process the acquired col |
---|
2686 | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% |
---|
2687 | % ready prevtype for next col spec. |
---|
2688 | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% |
---|
2689 | % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group |
---|
2690 | \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} |
---|
2691 | |
---|
2692 | |
---|
2693 | % executed just after preamble build is completed |
---|
2694 | % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue |
---|
2695 | \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax |
---|
2696 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% |
---|
2697 | {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% |
---|
2698 | \fi%num cols less than 1 |
---|
2699 | %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue |
---|
2700 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} |
---|
2701 | |
---|
2702 | |
---|
2703 | % Identify and return the column specifier's type code |
---|
2704 | \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% |
---|
2705 | % use only the very first token to determine the type |
---|
2706 | % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
---|
2707 | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
---|
2708 | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
---|
2709 | % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
---|
2710 | % n = number |
---|
2711 | % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) |
---|
2712 | % c = letter |
---|
2713 | % e = \end |
---|
2714 | % u = undefined |
---|
2715 | % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char |
---|
2716 | \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise |
---|
2717 | \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else |
---|
2718 | \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences |
---|
2719 | \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2720 | \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2721 | \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2722 | \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2723 | \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2724 | \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2725 | \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2726 | \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2727 | \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2728 | \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
---|
2729 | \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax |
---|
2730 | \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
---|
2731 | \if#2u\relax |
---|
2732 | \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% |
---|
2733 | {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak |
---|
2734 | as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} |
---|
2735 | |
---|
2736 | |
---|
2737 | % identify the current letter referenced column |
---|
2738 | % if invalid, use a default column |
---|
2739 | \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
---|
2740 | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name |
---|
2741 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak |
---|
2742 | Using a default centering column instead}% |
---|
2743 | {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
---|
2744 | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} |
---|
2745 | |
---|
2746 | |
---|
2747 | % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value |
---|
2748 | \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% |
---|
2749 | % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) |
---|
2750 | % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) |
---|
2751 | % : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) |
---|
2752 | % ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) |
---|
2753 | % ' = \quad 1em |
---|
2754 | % " = \qquad 2em |
---|
2755 | % . = 0.5\arraycolsep |
---|
2756 | % / = \arraycolsep |
---|
2757 | % ? = 2\arraycolsep |
---|
2758 | % * = 1fil |
---|
2759 | % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter |
---|
2760 | % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero |
---|
2761 | % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 |
---|
2762 | % value for 1em. |
---|
2763 | % |
---|
2764 | % use only the very first token to determine the type |
---|
2765 | % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text |
---|
2766 | % \noindent is used as a delimiter here |
---|
2767 | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
---|
2768 | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
---|
2769 | % get the math font 1em value |
---|
2770 | % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs |
---|
2771 | % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. |
---|
2772 | % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure |
---|
2773 | % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, |
---|
2774 | % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. |
---|
2775 | % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. |
---|
2776 | {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% |
---|
2777 | % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). |
---|
2778 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% |
---|
2779 | % identify the glue value based on the first token |
---|
2780 | % we discard anything after the first |
---|
2781 | \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2782 | \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2783 | \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2784 | \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2785 | \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2786 | \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2787 | \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2788 | \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else |
---|
2789 | \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
---|
2790 | \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else |
---|
2791 | \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else |
---|
2792 | \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else |
---|
2793 | \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
---|
2794 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak |
---|
2795 | column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
---|
2796 | 0pt instead}% |
---|
2797 | {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak |
---|
2798 | IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
---|
2799 | |
---|
2800 | |
---|
2801 | |
---|
2802 | % process a numerical digit from the column specification |
---|
2803 | % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value |
---|
2804 | % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired |
---|
2805 | \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% |
---|
2806 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
---|
2807 | specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
---|
2808 | after the first}% |
---|
2809 | {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
---|
2810 | in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
---|
2811 | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded |
---|
2812 | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% |
---|
2813 | \else% if we previously aborted a glue |
---|
2814 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion |
---|
2815 | \else%acquire this number |
---|
2816 | % save the previous type before the numerical digits started |
---|
2817 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% |
---|
2818 | \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% |
---|
2819 | \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan |
---|
2820 | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition |
---|
2821 | \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
---|
2822 | \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% |
---|
2823 | \else%user glue not defined |
---|
2824 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak |
---|
2825 | column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
---|
2826 | 0pt instead}% |
---|
2827 | {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak |
---|
2828 | \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% |
---|
2829 | \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
---|
2830 | \fi% glue defined or not |
---|
2831 | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue |
---|
2832 | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue |
---|
2833 | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition |
---|
2834 | \fi%close acquisition, get glue |
---|
2835 | \fi%discard or acquire number |
---|
2836 | \fi%prevtype glue or not |
---|
2837 | } |
---|
2838 | |
---|
2839 | |
---|
2840 | % process an acquired glue |
---|
2841 | % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble |
---|
2842 | \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions |
---|
2843 | \else |
---|
2844 | % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else |
---|
2845 | % as this is not used in the preamble, but before |
---|
2846 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
---|
2847 | \else%not the start glue |
---|
2848 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues |
---|
2849 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
---|
2850 | specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
---|
2851 | after the first}% |
---|
2852 | {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
---|
2853 | in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
---|
2854 | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
---|
2855 | \else% not a back to back glue |
---|
2856 | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble |
---|
2857 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi |
---|
2858 | \toks0={##}% |
---|
2859 | % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
---|
2860 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
---|
2861 | % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
---|
2862 | % the column definition |
---|
2863 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
---|
2864 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
---|
2865 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
---|
2866 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
---|
2867 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
---|
2868 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
2869 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
---|
2870 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
---|
2871 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
2872 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
---|
2873 | \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
---|
2874 | \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column |
---|
2875 | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak |
---|
2876 | type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak |
---|
2877 | specifier}% |
---|
2878 | {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak |
---|
2879 | between column types.}% |
---|
2880 | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
---|
2881 | \fi% previous was a column |
---|
2882 | \fi% back-to-back glues |
---|
2883 | \fi% is start column glue |
---|
2884 | \fi% prev type not a |
---|
2885 | } |
---|
2886 | |
---|
2887 | |
---|
2888 | % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble |
---|
2889 | \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else |
---|
2890 | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else |
---|
2891 | % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) |
---|
2892 | % so we must add this column to the preamble now |
---|
2893 | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first |
---|
2894 | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue |
---|
2895 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue |
---|
2896 | \toks0={##}% |
---|
2897 | % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
---|
2898 | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
---|
2899 | % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
---|
2900 | % the column definition |
---|
2901 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
---|
2902 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
---|
2903 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
---|
2904 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
---|
2905 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
2906 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
---|
2907 | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
---|
2908 | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
---|
2909 | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
---|
2910 | \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
---|
2911 | \fi%next type not numeral |
---|
2912 | \fi%next type not glue |
---|
2913 | } |
---|
2914 | |
---|
2915 | |
---|
2916 | %% |
---|
2917 | %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
---|
2918 | %% |
---|
2919 | |
---|
2920 | |
---|
2921 | |
---|
2922 | |
---|
2923 | % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different |
---|
2924 | % modes IEEEtran supports |
---|
2925 | \if@twoside |
---|
2926 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
---|
2927 | \def\ps@headings{% |
---|
2928 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
---|
2929 | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
---|
2930 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
2931 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
---|
2932 | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
---|
2933 | \else |
---|
2934 | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
---|
2935 | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
---|
2936 | \fi |
---|
2937 | \else |
---|
2938 | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} |
---|
2939 | \fi} |
---|
2940 | \else % not a technote |
---|
2941 | \def\ps@headings{% |
---|
2942 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
2943 | \def\@oddhead{} |
---|
2944 | \def\@evenhead{} |
---|
2945 | \else |
---|
2946 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
---|
2947 | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
---|
2948 | \fi |
---|
2949 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
2950 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
---|
2951 | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
---|
2952 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
---|
2953 | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
---|
2954 | \else |
---|
2955 | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
---|
2956 | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
---|
2957 | \fi |
---|
2958 | \else |
---|
2959 | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
---|
2960 | \fi} |
---|
2961 | \fi |
---|
2962 | \else % single side |
---|
2963 | \def\ps@headings{% |
---|
2964 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
2965 | \def\@oddhead{} |
---|
2966 | \def\@evenhead{} |
---|
2967 | \else |
---|
2968 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
---|
2969 | \def\@evenhead{} |
---|
2970 | \fi |
---|
2971 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
2972 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
---|
2973 | \def\@evenhead{} |
---|
2974 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
---|
2975 | \def\@oddfoot{} |
---|
2976 | \else |
---|
2977 | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} |
---|
2978 | \fi |
---|
2979 | \else |
---|
2980 | \def\@oddfoot{} |
---|
2981 | \fi |
---|
2982 | \def\@evenfoot{}} |
---|
2983 | \fi |
---|
2984 | |
---|
2985 | |
---|
2986 | % title page style |
---|
2987 | \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
---|
2988 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
2989 | \def\@oddhead{}% |
---|
2990 | \def\@evenhead{}% |
---|
2991 | \else |
---|
2992 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
---|
2993 | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
---|
2994 | \fi |
---|
2995 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
2996 | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
---|
2997 | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
---|
2998 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
---|
2999 | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
---|
3000 | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
---|
3001 | \fi |
---|
3002 | \else |
---|
3003 | % all non-draft mode footers |
---|
3004 | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
---|
3005 | % for title pages that are using a pubid |
---|
3006 | % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option |
---|
3007 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3008 | \else |
---|
3009 | \footskip 0pt% |
---|
3010 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3011 | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3012 | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3013 | \else |
---|
3014 | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3015 | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3016 | \fi |
---|
3017 | \fi |
---|
3018 | \fi |
---|
3019 | \fi} |
---|
3020 | |
---|
3021 | |
---|
3022 | % peer review cover page style |
---|
3023 | \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% |
---|
3024 | \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% |
---|
3025 | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
---|
3026 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
3027 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
---|
3028 | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
---|
3029 | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
---|
3030 | \fi |
---|
3031 | \else |
---|
3032 | % non-draft mode footers |
---|
3033 | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
---|
3034 | \footskip 0pt% |
---|
3035 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3036 | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3037 | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3038 | \else |
---|
3039 | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3040 | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
---|
3041 | \fi |
---|
3042 | \fi |
---|
3043 | \fi} |
---|
3044 | |
---|
3045 | |
---|
3046 | % start with empty headings |
---|
3047 | \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} |
---|
3048 | |
---|
3049 | |
---|
3050 | %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same |
---|
3051 | %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. |
---|
3052 | %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text |
---|
3053 | %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually |
---|
3054 | %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the |
---|
3055 | %% arguments to \markboth. |
---|
3056 | \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}% |
---|
3057 | \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}} |
---|
3058 | \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} |
---|
3059 | |
---|
3060 | \def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
---|
3061 | January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
---|
3062 | July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
---|
3063 | \space\number\day, \number\year} |
---|
3064 | |
---|
3065 | |
---|
3066 | |
---|
3067 | |
---|
3068 | %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS |
---|
3069 | %% |
---|
3070 | %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff |
---|
3071 | % |
---|
3072 | % |
---|
3073 | % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" |
---|
3074 | \def\@citex[#1]#2{% |
---|
3075 | \let\@citea\@empty |
---|
3076 | \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do |
---|
3077 | {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% |
---|
3078 | \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% |
---|
3079 | \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi |
---|
3080 | \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% |
---|
3081 | \G@refundefinedtrue |
---|
3082 | \@latex@warning |
---|
3083 | {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% |
---|
3084 | {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} |
---|
3085 | |
---|
3086 | % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's |
---|
3087 | % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the |
---|
3088 | % following format controls are already defined and will not |
---|
3089 | % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the |
---|
3090 | % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - |
---|
3091 | % all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] |
---|
3092 | % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. |
---|
3093 | % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will |
---|
3094 | % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally |
---|
3095 | % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in |
---|
3096 | % that \cite. |
---|
3097 | % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments |
---|
3098 | % to produce the IEEE style. |
---|
3099 | \def\citepunct{], [} |
---|
3100 | \def\citedash{]--[} |
---|
3101 | |
---|
3102 | % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty |
---|
3103 | \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} |
---|
3104 | |
---|
3105 | % V1.6 class files should always provide these |
---|
3106 | \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} |
---|
3107 | \let\@openbib@code\@empty |
---|
3108 | |
---|
3109 | |
---|
3110 | % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. |
---|
3111 | % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in |
---|
3112 | % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: |
---|
3113 | % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} |
---|
3114 | % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} |
---|
3115 | \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} |
---|
3116 | \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack |
---|
3117 | \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% |
---|
3118 | \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% |
---|
3119 | \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% |
---|
3120 | \@esphack} |
---|
3121 | |
---|
3122 | % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before |
---|
3123 | % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance |
---|
3124 | % the columns on the last page |
---|
3125 | \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that |
---|
3126 | % the command is not executed |
---|
3127 | \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} |
---|
3128 | |
---|
3129 | % allow the user to alter the triggered command |
---|
3130 | \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} |
---|
3131 | |
---|
3132 | % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the |
---|
3133 | % command is executed |
---|
3134 | \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% |
---|
3135 | \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% |
---|
3136 | |
---|
3137 | % trigger command at the given reference |
---|
3138 | \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% |
---|
3139 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% |
---|
3140 | \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} |
---|
3141 | |
---|
3142 | |
---|
3143 | \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} |
---|
3144 | |
---|
3145 | % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers |
---|
3146 | \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} |
---|
3147 | |
---|
3148 | % controls bib item spacing |
---|
3149 | \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} |
---|
3150 | |
---|
3151 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} |
---|
3152 | |
---|
3153 | |
---|
3154 | \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% |
---|
3155 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% |
---|
3156 | % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger |
---|
3157 | \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% |
---|
3158 | \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
---|
3159 | {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% |
---|
3160 | \leftmargin\labelwidth |
---|
3161 | \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax |
---|
3162 | \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax |
---|
3163 | \usecounter{enumiv}% |
---|
3164 | \let\p@enumiv\@empty |
---|
3165 | \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
---|
3166 | \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% |
---|
3167 | \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% |
---|
3168 | \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% |
---|
3169 | % originally: |
---|
3170 | % \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% |
---|
3171 | % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more |
---|
3172 | % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. |
---|
3173 | % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with |
---|
3174 | % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, |
---|
3175 | % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. |
---|
3176 | % MDS 11/2000 |
---|
3177 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% |
---|
3178 | \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% |
---|
3179 | \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} |
---|
3180 | \let\endthebibliography=\endlist |
---|
3181 | |
---|
3182 | |
---|
3183 | |
---|
3184 | |
---|
3185 | % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS |
---|
3186 | % |
---|
3187 | % |
---|
3188 | % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author |
---|
3189 | % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font |
---|
3190 | \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} |
---|
3191 | |
---|
3192 | |
---|
3193 | % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. |
---|
3194 | % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote |
---|
3195 | % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} |
---|
3196 | % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you |
---|
3197 | % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote |
---|
3198 | % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. |
---|
3199 | % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical |
---|
3200 | % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that |
---|
3201 | % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding |
---|
3202 | % with the text above. |
---|
3203 | % V1.7 make this a robust command |
---|
3204 | \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% |
---|
3205 | \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% |
---|
3206 | \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} |
---|
3207 | |
---|
3208 | |
---|
3209 | % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS |
---|
3210 | % |
---|
3211 | % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
---|
3212 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
---|
3213 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
---|
3214 | % The default if the user does not use an author block |
---|
3215 | \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} |
---|
3216 | |
---|
3217 | % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) |
---|
3218 | % can be negative |
---|
3219 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} |
---|
3220 | % compsoc conferences need more space here |
---|
3221 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} |
---|
3222 | |
---|
3223 | % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
---|
3224 | % This can be negative. |
---|
3225 | % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these |
---|
3226 | % controls in place in case they ever change their mind. |
---|
3227 | % Personally, I like 0.75ex. |
---|
3228 | %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} |
---|
3229 | %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} |
---|
3230 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} |
---|
3231 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} |
---|
3232 | % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
---|
3233 | % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make |
---|
3234 | % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the |
---|
3235 | % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, |
---|
3236 | % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep |
---|
3237 | % these above 2.6ex |
---|
3238 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} |
---|
3239 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} |
---|
3240 | |
---|
3241 | % This tracks the required strut size. |
---|
3242 | % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. |
---|
3243 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} |
---|
3244 | |
---|
3245 | % variables to retain font size and style across groups |
---|
3246 | % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later |
---|
3247 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} |
---|
3248 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} |
---|
3249 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} |
---|
3250 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} |
---|
3251 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} |
---|
3252 | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} |
---|
3253 | |
---|
3254 | % saves the current font attributes |
---|
3255 | \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% |
---|
3256 | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% |
---|
3257 | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% |
---|
3258 | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% |
---|
3259 | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% |
---|
3260 | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} |
---|
3261 | |
---|
3262 | % restores the saved font attributes |
---|
3263 | \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% |
---|
3264 | \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% |
---|
3265 | \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% |
---|
3266 | \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% |
---|
3267 | \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% |
---|
3268 | \selectfont} |
---|
3269 | |
---|
3270 | |
---|
3271 | % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column |
---|
3272 | \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse |
---|
3273 | |
---|
3274 | |
---|
3275 | % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace |
---|
3276 | % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines |
---|
3277 | % within the halign environment. |
---|
3278 | % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above |
---|
3279 | % baseline portion at 70% of the total length. |
---|
3280 | % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch |
---|
3281 | \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% |
---|
3282 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
---|
3283 | \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} |
---|
3284 | |
---|
3285 | |
---|
3286 | % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. |
---|
3287 | % Makes formatting easy for conferences |
---|
3288 | % |
---|
3289 | % use real definitions in conference mode |
---|
3290 | % name block |
---|
3291 | \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style |
---|
3292 | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row |
---|
3293 | % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
---|
3294 | % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
---|
3295 | % do a spacer row if needed |
---|
3296 | \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi |
---|
3297 | \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
---|
3298 | %restore the correct strut value |
---|
3299 | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% |
---|
3300 | % input the author names |
---|
3301 | #1% |
---|
3302 | % end the row if the user did not already |
---|
3303 | \crcr} |
---|
3304 | % spacer row for names |
---|
3305 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} |
---|
3306 | % |
---|
3307 | % affiliation block |
---|
3308 | \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style |
---|
3309 | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row |
---|
3310 | % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
---|
3311 | % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
---|
3312 | % do a spacer row if needed |
---|
3313 | \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi |
---|
3314 | \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
---|
3315 | %restore the correct strut value |
---|
3316 | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% |
---|
3317 | % input the author affiliations |
---|
3318 | #1% |
---|
3319 | % end the row if the user did not already |
---|
3320 | \crcr} |
---|
3321 | % spacer row for affiliations |
---|
3322 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} |
---|
3323 | |
---|
3324 | |
---|
3325 | % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other |
---|
3326 | % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. |
---|
3327 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
3328 | \else |
---|
3329 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else |
---|
3330 | % not conference or peerreviewca mode |
---|
3331 | \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% |
---|
3332 | \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% |
---|
3333 | \fi |
---|
3334 | \fi |
---|
3335 | |
---|
3336 | |
---|
3337 | |
---|
3338 | % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular |
---|
3339 | \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style |
---|
3340 | \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing |
---|
3341 | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
---|
3342 | \baselineskip=0pt\relax% |
---|
3343 | \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font |
---|
3344 | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
---|
3345 | \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one |
---|
3346 | \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing |
---|
3347 | \everycr{}% ensure no problems here |
---|
3348 | \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet |
---|
3349 | \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space |
---|
3350 | \vtop\bgroup%vtop box |
---|
3351 | \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax |
---|
3352 | \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} |
---|
3353 | |
---|
3354 | % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
---|
3355 | \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} |
---|
3356 | |
---|
3357 | % handle bogus star form |
---|
3358 | \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} |
---|
3359 | |
---|
3360 | % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
---|
3361 | \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} |
---|
3362 | |
---|
3363 | % end the line and do the optional spacer |
---|
3364 | \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} |
---|
3365 | |
---|
3366 | |
---|
3367 | |
---|
3368 | % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages |
---|
3369 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNand |
---|
3370 | \@IEEEWARNandtrue |
---|
3371 | |
---|
3372 | % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a |
---|
3373 | % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid |
---|
3374 | % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. |
---|
3375 | \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override |
---|
3376 | |
---|
3377 | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only |
---|
3378 | when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} |
---|
3379 | |
---|
3380 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
---|
3381 | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
---|
3382 | \fi |
---|
3383 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
---|
3384 | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
---|
3385 | \fi |
---|
3386 | |
---|
3387 | |
---|
3388 | % page clearing command |
---|
3389 | % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles |
---|
3390 | % for the inserted blank pages |
---|
3391 | \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else |
---|
3392 | \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} |
---|
3393 | |
---|
3394 | |
---|
3395 | % user command to invoke the title page |
---|
3396 | \def\maketitle{\par% |
---|
3397 | \begingroup% |
---|
3398 | \normalfont% |
---|
3399 | \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty |
---|
3400 | \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author |
---|
3401 | \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. |
---|
3402 | \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines |
---|
3403 | \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info |
---|
3404 | % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc |
---|
3405 | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% |
---|
3406 | \normalsize% |
---|
3407 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3408 | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
---|
3409 | \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% |
---|
3410 | \else |
---|
3411 | \if@twocolumn% |
---|
3412 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
---|
3413 | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
---|
3414 | \else |
---|
3415 | \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% |
---|
3416 | \fi |
---|
3417 | \else |
---|
3418 | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
---|
3419 | \fi |
---|
3420 | \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% |
---|
3421 | \fi |
---|
3422 | % pullup page for pubid if used. |
---|
3423 | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
---|
3424 | \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% |
---|
3425 | \fi |
---|
3426 | \endgroup |
---|
3427 | \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax |
---|
3428 | \gdef\@thanks{}% |
---|
3429 | % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers |
---|
3430 | % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% |
---|
3431 | \let\thanks\relax} |
---|
3432 | |
---|
3433 | |
---|
3434 | |
---|
3435 | % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext |
---|
3436 | \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} |
---|
3437 | |
---|
3438 | % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice |
---|
3439 | % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional |
---|
3440 | % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line |
---|
3441 | \def\@maketitle{\newpage |
---|
3442 | \begin{center}% |
---|
3443 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes |
---|
3444 | {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author |
---|
3445 | \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
---|
3446 | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par |
---|
3447 | \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
---|
3448 | \else% not a technote |
---|
3449 | \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
---|
3450 | \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% |
---|
3451 | % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode |
---|
3452 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
---|
3453 | {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
---|
3454 | \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax |
---|
3455 | \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal |
---|
3456 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
---|
3457 | % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode |
---|
3458 | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
---|
3459 | \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par |
---|
3460 | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
---|
3461 | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
---|
3462 | \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
---|
3463 | \else% journal or peerreview |
---|
3464 | {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par |
---|
3465 | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
---|
3466 | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
---|
3467 | \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
---|
3468 | \fi |
---|
3469 | \fi |
---|
3470 | \fi\end{center}} |
---|
3471 | |
---|
3472 | |
---|
3473 | |
---|
3474 | % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers |
---|
3475 | \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% |
---|
3476 | \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% |
---|
3477 | \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} |
---|
3478 | |
---|
3479 | % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def |
---|
3480 | % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule |
---|
3481 | \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} |
---|
3482 | |
---|
3483 | |
---|
3484 | \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark |
---|
3485 | \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
---|
3486 | \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape |
---|
3487 | \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} |
---|
3488 | \let\@thanks\@empty |
---|
3489 | |
---|
3490 | % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. |
---|
3491 | \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} |
---|
3492 | |
---|
3493 | |
---|
3494 | % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and |
---|
3495 | % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. |
---|
3496 | \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% |
---|
3497 | \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% |
---|
3498 | \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} |
---|
3499 | |
---|
3500 | |
---|
3501 | % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item |
---|
3502 | \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse |
---|
3503 | |
---|
3504 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3505 | % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks |
---|
3506 | % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace |
---|
3507 | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark |
---|
3508 | \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
---|
3509 | \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule |
---|
3510 | {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax |
---|
3511 | \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} |
---|
3512 | \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} |
---|
3513 | \else |
---|
3514 | % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks |
---|
3515 | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} |
---|
3516 | % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] |
---|
3517 | \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% |
---|
3518 | {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} |
---|
3519 | % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument |
---|
3520 | \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break |
---|
3521 | \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} |
---|
3522 | \fi |
---|
3523 | |
---|
3524 | |
---|
3525 | % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed |
---|
3526 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3527 | \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% |
---|
3528 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
---|
3529 | \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] |
---|
3530 | \else |
---|
3531 | \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip |
---|
3532 | \fi |
---|
3533 | \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} |
---|
3534 | \else |
---|
3535 | % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected |
---|
3536 | \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} |
---|
3537 | \fi |
---|
3538 | |
---|
3539 | % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. |
---|
3540 | \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% |
---|
3541 | \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par |
---|
3542 | \end{center}} |
---|
3543 | |
---|
3544 | |
---|
3545 | |
---|
3546 | % V1.6 |
---|
3547 | % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text |
---|
3548 | % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column |
---|
3549 | % of two column text (technotes). |
---|
3550 | \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize |
---|
3551 | % adjust spacing to next text |
---|
3552 | % v1.6b handle peer review papers |
---|
3553 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3554 | % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages |
---|
3555 | % regardless of the other paper modes |
---|
3556 | \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip |
---|
3557 | \else |
---|
3558 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference |
---|
3559 | \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
---|
3560 | \else% |
---|
3561 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote |
---|
3562 | \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
---|
3563 | \else% journal uses more space |
---|
3564 | \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% |
---|
3565 | \fi |
---|
3566 | \fi |
---|
3567 | \fi}} |
---|
3568 | |
---|
3569 | |
---|
3570 | % V1.6 |
---|
3571 | % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors |
---|
3572 | % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two |
---|
3573 | % column text (most common) |
---|
3574 | % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the |
---|
3575 | % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip |
---|
3576 | % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the |
---|
3577 | % text on the titlepage |
---|
3578 | % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. |
---|
3579 | \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% |
---|
3580 | % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done |
---|
3581 | \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
---|
3582 | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
---|
3583 | \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names |
---|
3584 | \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns |
---|
3585 | \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines |
---|
3586 | % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer |
---|
3587 | % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to |
---|
3588 | % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be |
---|
3589 | % lengthened |
---|
3590 | % default to journal values |
---|
3591 | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% |
---|
3592 | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% |
---|
3593 | % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing |
---|
3594 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference |
---|
3595 | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
---|
3596 | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
---|
3597 | \fi |
---|
3598 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote |
---|
3599 | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
---|
3600 | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
---|
3601 | \fi% |
---|
3602 | % get the height that the title will take up |
---|
3603 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3604 | \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% |
---|
3605 | \else |
---|
3606 | \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% |
---|
3607 | \fi |
---|
3608 | \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign |
---|
3609 | % add the height of the page textheight |
---|
3610 | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% |
---|
3611 | % correct for title pages using pubid |
---|
3612 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
---|
3613 | % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. |
---|
3614 | % And the cover page uses a static spacer. |
---|
3615 | \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi |
---|
3616 | \fi% |
---|
3617 | % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer |
---|
3618 | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% |
---|
3619 | % \topskip takes away some too |
---|
3620 | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% |
---|
3621 | % calculate the column height of the main text for lines |
---|
3622 | % now we calculate the main text height as if holding |
---|
3623 | % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first |
---|
3624 | % and discard any excess fractional remainder |
---|
3625 | % we subtracted the first line, because the first line |
---|
3626 | % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the |
---|
3627 | % rest of the lines. |
---|
3628 | \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
---|
3629 | \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
---|
3630 | \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
---|
3631 | % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will |
---|
3632 | % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always |
---|
3633 | % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer |
---|
3634 | % number of normal size lines |
---|
3635 | % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
---|
3636 | % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
---|
3637 | \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% |
---|
3638 | \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
---|
3639 | \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
---|
3640 | % this is the calculated height of the spacer |
---|
3641 | % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
---|
3642 | % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
---|
3643 | \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
---|
3644 | \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value |
---|
3645 | % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase |
---|
3646 | \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% |
---|
3647 | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
---|
3648 | % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead |
---|
3649 | \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% |
---|
3650 | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
---|
3651 | \fi% |
---|
3652 | \else% |
---|
3653 | % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease |
---|
3654 | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
---|
3655 | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
---|
3656 | \fi% |
---|
3657 | % set the calculated rigid spacer |
---|
3658 | \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} |
---|
3659 | |
---|
3660 | |
---|
3661 | |
---|
3662 | % V1.6 |
---|
3663 | % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area |
---|
3664 | % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed |
---|
3665 | % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. |
---|
3666 | \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax |
---|
3667 | \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} |
---|
3668 | |
---|
3669 | % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords |
---|
3670 | % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for |
---|
3671 | % in the dynamic sizer. |
---|
3672 | \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax |
---|
3673 | \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} |
---|
3674 | % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if |
---|
3675 | % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed |
---|
3676 | % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. |
---|
3677 | \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% |
---|
3678 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf |
---|
3679 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi |
---|
3680 | \else% or if not compsoc |
---|
3681 | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} |
---|
3682 | |
---|
3683 | |
---|
3684 | % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current |
---|
3685 | % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. |
---|
3686 | \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont |
---|
3687 | \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% |
---|
3688 | \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} |
---|
3689 | |
---|
3690 | |
---|
3691 | % abstract and keywords are in \small, except |
---|
3692 | % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize |
---|
3693 | % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small |
---|
3694 | % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt |
---|
3695 | \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} |
---|
3696 | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
---|
3697 | \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} |
---|
3698 | \fi |
---|
3699 | |
---|
3700 | % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize |
---|
3701 | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} |
---|
3702 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} |
---|
3703 | |
---|
3704 | |
---|
3705 | |
---|
3706 | |
---|
3707 | % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines |
---|
3708 | % so that spacing is more tightly controlled. |
---|
3709 | \def\abstract{\normalfont |
---|
3710 | \if@twocolumn |
---|
3711 | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax |
---|
3712 | \else |
---|
3713 | \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
---|
3714 | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3715 | % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in |
---|
3716 | % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) |
---|
3717 | \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi |
---|
3718 | \normalfont\normalsize} |
---|
3719 | |
---|
3720 | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont |
---|
3721 | \if@twocolumn |
---|
3722 | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
---|
3723 | \else |
---|
3724 | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
---|
3725 | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3726 | \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi |
---|
3727 | \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% |
---|
3728 | \normalfont\normalsize} |
---|
3729 | |
---|
3730 | % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms |
---|
3731 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3732 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
---|
3733 | \def\abstract{\normalfont |
---|
3734 | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
---|
3735 | \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
---|
3736 | \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3737 | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip |
---|
3738 | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
---|
3739 | \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
---|
3740 | \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3741 | \else% compsoc not conference |
---|
3742 | \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
---|
3743 | \if@twocolumn |
---|
3744 | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax |
---|
3745 | \else |
---|
3746 | \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
---|
3747 | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3748 | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
---|
3749 | \if@twocolumn |
---|
3750 | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent |
---|
3751 | \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
---|
3752 | \else |
---|
3753 | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
---|
3754 | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
---|
3755 | \fi |
---|
3756 | \fi |
---|
3757 | |
---|
3758 | |
---|
3759 | |
---|
3760 | % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that |
---|
3761 | % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token |
---|
3762 | % |
---|
3763 | % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input |
---|
3764 | % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not |
---|
3765 | % affect the formatting of the text |
---|
3766 | \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% |
---|
3767 | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% |
---|
3768 | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% |
---|
3769 | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% |
---|
3770 | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % |
---|
3771 | \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% |
---|
3772 | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% |
---|
3773 | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
---|
3774 | \fi% |
---|
3775 | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% |
---|
3776 | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
---|
3777 | \fi% |
---|
3778 | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% |
---|
3779 | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
---|
3780 | \fi% |
---|
3781 | % a control space will come in as a macro |
---|
3782 | % when it is the last one on a line |
---|
3783 | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% |
---|
3784 | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
---|
3785 | \fi% |
---|
3786 | % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one |
---|
3787 | % else spit it out and stop gobbling |
---|
3788 | \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% |
---|
3789 | \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% |
---|
3790 | \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% |
---|
3791 | |
---|
3792 | |
---|
3793 | |
---|
3794 | |
---|
3795 | % TITLING OF SECTIONS |
---|
3796 | \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are |
---|
3797 | % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space |
---|
3798 | % spacing from section number to title |
---|
3799 | % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation |
---|
3800 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3801 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
3802 | \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } |
---|
3803 | \fi\fi |
---|
3804 | |
---|
3805 | |
---|
3806 | \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} |
---|
3807 | |
---|
3808 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3809 | % compsoc journals need extra spacing |
---|
3810 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else |
---|
3811 | \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
---|
3812 | \fi\fi |
---|
3813 | |
---|
3814 | %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control |
---|
3815 | %and use \@@par rather than \par |
---|
3816 | \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% |
---|
3817 | \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth |
---|
3818 | \let\@svsec\@empty |
---|
3819 | \else |
---|
3820 | \refstepcounter{#1}% |
---|
3821 | % load section label and spacer into \@svsec |
---|
3822 | \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% |
---|
3823 | \fi% |
---|
3824 | \@tempskipa #5\relax |
---|
3825 | \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high |
---|
3826 | \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading |
---|
3827 | \noindent % subsections are NOT indented |
---|
3828 | % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title |
---|
3829 | % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
---|
3830 | {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% |
---|
3831 | \endgroup |
---|
3832 | \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
---|
3833 | \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% |
---|
3834 | \else % printout low level headings |
---|
3835 | % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
---|
3836 | % got rid of sectionmark stuff |
---|
3837 | \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% |
---|
3838 | \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
---|
3839 | \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% |
---|
3840 | \fi%skip down |
---|
3841 | \@xsect{#5}} |
---|
3842 | |
---|
3843 | |
---|
3844 | % section* handler |
---|
3845 | %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control |
---|
3846 | %and use \@@par rather than \par |
---|
3847 | \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax |
---|
3848 | \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ |
---|
3849 | %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup |
---|
3850 | % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
---|
3851 | \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup |
---|
3852 | % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
---|
3853 | \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi |
---|
3854 | \@xsect{#3}} |
---|
3855 | |
---|
3856 | |
---|
3857 | %% SECTION heading spacing and font |
---|
3858 | %% |
---|
3859 | % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name |
---|
3860 | % (for \@sect) #2 - section level |
---|
3861 | % #3 - section heading indent |
---|
3862 | % #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) |
---|
3863 | % If negative, make stretch parts negative too! |
---|
3864 | % #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, |
---|
3865 | % negative: amount to indent main text after heading |
---|
3866 | % Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation |
---|
3867 | % #6 - font control |
---|
3868 | % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent |
---|
3869 | % trouble when you do something like: |
---|
3870 | % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... |
---|
3871 | % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section |
---|
3872 | % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good |
---|
3873 | % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. |
---|
3874 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
---|
3875 | % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode |
---|
3876 | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
---|
3877 | {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
---|
3878 | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
---|
3879 | {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
---|
3880 | \else % for journals |
---|
3881 | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex |
---|
3882 | {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
---|
3883 | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% |
---|
3884 | {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
---|
3885 | \fi |
---|
3886 | |
---|
3887 | % for both journals and conferences |
---|
3888 | % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody |
---|
3889 | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
---|
3890 | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
---|
3891 | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
---|
3892 | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
---|
3893 | |
---|
3894 | |
---|
3895 | % compsoc |
---|
3896 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3897 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
3898 | % compsoc conference |
---|
3899 | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
---|
3900 | {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% |
---|
3901 | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
---|
3902 | {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% |
---|
3903 | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
---|
3904 | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% |
---|
3905 | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
---|
3906 | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
---|
3907 | \else% compsoc journals |
---|
3908 | % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles |
---|
3909 | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% |
---|
3910 | {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% |
---|
3911 | % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, |
---|
3912 | % I have to look up an example. |
---|
3913 | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% |
---|
3914 | {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% |
---|
3915 | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% |
---|
3916 | {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% |
---|
3917 | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% |
---|
3918 | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
---|
3919 | \fi\fi |
---|
3920 | |
---|
3921 | |
---|
3922 | |
---|
3923 | |
---|
3924 | %% ENVIRONMENTS |
---|
3925 | % "box" symbols at end of proofs |
---|
3926 | \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box |
---|
3927 | % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one |
---|
3928 | \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} |
---|
3929 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
3930 | \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc |
---|
3931 | \else |
---|
3932 | \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed |
---|
3933 | \fi |
---|
3934 | |
---|
3935 | % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support |
---|
3936 | % for an optional argument. |
---|
3937 | \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} |
---|
3938 | \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }} |
---|
3939 | \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} |
---|
3940 | |
---|
3941 | |
---|
3942 | %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable |
---|
3943 | \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent |
---|
3944 | \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% |
---|
3945 | \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
---|
3946 | \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% |
---|
3947 | % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics |
---|
3948 | % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. |
---|
3949 | \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
---|
3950 | % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with |
---|
3951 | % lines below. |
---|
3952 | \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} |
---|
3953 | |
---|
3954 | % V1.6 |
---|
3955 | % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection |
---|
3956 | % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. |
---|
3957 | % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number |
---|
3958 | % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. |
---|
3959 | % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
---|
3960 | % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. |
---|
3961 | % |
---|
3962 | % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override |
---|
3963 | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} |
---|
3964 | % string macro |
---|
3965 | \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} |
---|
3966 | |
---|
3967 | % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
---|
3968 | % if section in_counter is used |
---|
3969 | \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% |
---|
3970 | \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname |
---|
3971 | {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% |
---|
3972 | \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} |
---|
3973 | \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection |
---|
3974 | \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
---|
3975 | \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep |
---|
3976 | \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
---|
3977 | \else |
---|
3978 | \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
---|
3979 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep |
---|
3980 | \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
---|
3981 | \fi |
---|
3982 | \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% |
---|
3983 | \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} |
---|
3984 | |
---|
3985 | |
---|
3986 | |
---|
3987 | %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE |
---|
3988 | \ps@headings |
---|
3989 | \pagenumbering{arabic} |
---|
3990 | |
---|
3991 | % normally the page counter starts at 1 |
---|
3992 | \setcounter{page}{1} |
---|
3993 | % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 |
---|
3994 | % (for duplex printing) |
---|
3995 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
---|
3996 | \if@twoside |
---|
3997 | \setcounter{page}{-1} |
---|
3998 | \else |
---|
3999 | \setcounter{page}{0} |
---|
4000 | \fi |
---|
4001 | \fi |
---|
4002 | |
---|
4003 | % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as |
---|
4004 | % needed when single sided |
---|
4005 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi |
---|
4006 | % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and |
---|
4007 | % enforce a rigid position for the last lines |
---|
4008 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
---|
4009 | % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn |
---|
4010 | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
---|
4011 | \twocolumn |
---|
4012 | \fi |
---|
4013 | \sloppy |
---|
4014 | \flushbottom |
---|
4015 | \fi |
---|
4016 | |
---|
4017 | |
---|
4018 | |
---|
4019 | |
---|
4020 | % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions |
---|
4021 | |
---|
4022 | % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package |
---|
4023 | % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
---|
4024 | % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command |
---|
4025 | % is present or not. |
---|
4026 | % For instance: |
---|
4027 | % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} |
---|
4028 | % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if |
---|
4029 | % \appendices is invoked. |
---|
4030 | % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending |
---|
4031 | % on whether the user specifies a title: |
---|
4032 | % \section{My appendix title} |
---|
4033 | % or not: |
---|
4034 | % \section{} |
---|
4035 | % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title |
---|
4036 | % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of |
---|
4037 | % contents |
---|
4038 | \begingroup |
---|
4039 | \catcode`\Q=3 |
---|
4040 | \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} |
---|
4041 | \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} |
---|
4042 | \endgroup |
---|
4043 | % end of \@ifmtarg defs |
---|
4044 | |
---|
4045 | |
---|
4046 | % V1.7 |
---|
4047 | % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition |
---|
4048 | % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices |
---|
4049 | % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other |
---|
4050 | % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) |
---|
4051 | \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section |
---|
4052 | \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} |
---|
4053 | |
---|
4054 | % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} |
---|
4055 | % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no |
---|
4056 | % argument (title) |
---|
4057 | % note we reroute the call to the old \section* |
---|
4058 | \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% |
---|
4059 | \@ifmtarg{#1}{% |
---|
4060 | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% |
---|
4061 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% |
---|
4062 | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% |
---|
4063 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} |
---|
4064 | |
---|
4065 | % we use this if the user calls \section{} after |
---|
4066 | % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the |
---|
4067 | % command and its argument. Then, warn the user. |
---|
4068 | \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless |
---|
4069 | \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} |
---|
4070 | |
---|
4071 | |
---|
4072 | % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls |
---|
4073 | % and in the Table of Contents. |
---|
4074 | % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself |
---|
4075 | |
---|
4076 | % appendix command for one single appendix |
---|
4077 | % normally has no heading. However, if you want a |
---|
4078 | % heading, you can do so via the optional argument: |
---|
4079 | % \appendix[Optional Heading] |
---|
4080 | \def\appendix{\relax} |
---|
4081 | \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
---|
4082 | % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
---|
4083 | \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% |
---|
4084 | % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
---|
4085 | \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
---|
4086 | \setcounter{section}{0}% |
---|
4087 | \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
---|
4088 | \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
---|
4089 | \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
---|
4090 | \gdef\thesection{A}% |
---|
4091 | \gdef\thesectiondis{}% |
---|
4092 | \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% |
---|
4093 | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} |
---|
4094 | \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
---|
4095 | \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% |
---|
4096 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% |
---|
4097 | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% |
---|
4098 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% |
---|
4099 | % redefine \section command for appendix |
---|
4100 | % leave \section* as is |
---|
4101 | \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% |
---|
4102 | \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument |
---|
4103 | % of the normal form |
---|
4104 | } |
---|
4105 | |
---|
4106 | |
---|
4107 | |
---|
4108 | % appendices command for multiple appendices |
---|
4109 | % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to |
---|
4110 | % declare the individual appendices |
---|
4111 | \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
---|
4112 | % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
---|
4113 | \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% |
---|
4114 | % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
---|
4115 | \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
---|
4116 | \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 |
---|
4117 | \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
---|
4118 | \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
---|
4119 | \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
---|
4120 | \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% |
---|
4121 | \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% |
---|
4122 | \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% |
---|
4123 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% |
---|
4124 | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} |
---|
4125 | \else% |
---|
4126 | \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% |
---|
4127 | \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% |
---|
4128 | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% |
---|
4129 | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} |
---|
4130 | \fi% |
---|
4131 | \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
---|
4132 | \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix |
---|
4133 | % redefine \section command for appendices |
---|
4134 | % leave \section* as is |
---|
4135 | \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form |
---|
4136 | \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, |
---|
4137 | \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument |
---|
4138 | % of the normal form |
---|
4139 | } |
---|
4140 | |
---|
4141 | |
---|
4142 | |
---|
4143 | % \IEEEPARstart |
---|
4144 | % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the |
---|
4145 | % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter |
---|
4146 | % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the |
---|
4147 | % first word which will be rendered in upper case. |
---|
4148 | % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: |
---|
4149 | % |
---|
4150 | % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment |
---|
4151 | % within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. |
---|
4152 | % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family |
---|
4153 | % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that |
---|
4154 | % interword glue will now work as normal. |
---|
4155 | % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. |
---|
4156 | % |
---|
4157 | % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. |
---|
4158 | % |
---|
4159 | % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users |
---|
4160 | % to change the font style. |
---|
4161 | % |
---|
4162 | % the number of lines that are indented to clear it |
---|
4163 | % may need to increase if using decenders |
---|
4164 | \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} |
---|
4165 | % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart |
---|
4166 | % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to |
---|
4167 | % be overly cautious |
---|
4168 | \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} |
---|
4169 | % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text |
---|
4170 | % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). |
---|
4171 | \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} |
---|
4172 | % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline |
---|
4173 | % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum |
---|
4174 | % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current |
---|
4175 | % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip |
---|
4176 | % so that it can respond to changes therein. |
---|
4177 | \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} |
---|
4178 | % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, |
---|
4179 | % can take zero or one argument. |
---|
4180 | \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} |
---|
4181 | % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
---|
4182 | % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. |
---|
4183 | \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
---|
4184 | % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, |
---|
4185 | % can take zero or one argument. |
---|
4186 | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} |
---|
4187 | % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
---|
4188 | % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. |
---|
4189 | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
---|
4190 | % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. |
---|
4191 | % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced |
---|
4192 | % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. |
---|
4193 | \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} |
---|
4194 | % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. |
---|
4195 | \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} |
---|
4196 | % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. |
---|
4197 | \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} |
---|
4198 | |
---|
4199 | % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style |
---|
4200 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
4201 | \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} |
---|
4202 | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} |
---|
4203 | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} |
---|
4204 | \fi |
---|
4205 | |
---|
4206 | % definition of \IEEEPARstart |
---|
4207 | % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES |
---|
4208 | % |
---|
4209 | % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use |
---|
4210 | % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter |
---|
4211 | % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second |
---|
4212 | % argument is the rest of the first word(s). |
---|
4213 | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% |
---|
4214 | % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
---|
4215 | % on a new one |
---|
4216 | \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% |
---|
4217 | % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE |
---|
4218 | % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued |
---|
4219 | \noindent |
---|
4220 | % calculate the desired height of the big letter |
---|
4221 | % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font |
---|
4222 | % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline |
---|
4223 | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% |
---|
4224 | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% |
---|
4225 | % extract the name of the current font in bold |
---|
4226 | % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME |
---|
4227 | \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% |
---|
4228 | {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% |
---|
4229 | \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% |
---|
4230 | % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired |
---|
4231 | % height of the drop letter |
---|
4232 | \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% |
---|
4233 | % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) |
---|
4234 | \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
---|
4235 | % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size |
---|
4236 | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% |
---|
4237 | % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the |
---|
4238 | % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. |
---|
4239 | \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% |
---|
4240 | \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% |
---|
4241 | \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% |
---|
4242 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% |
---|
4243 | \fi% |
---|
4244 | % and store it as a counter |
---|
4245 | \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
---|
4246 | % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital |
---|
4247 | % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, |
---|
4248 | % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
---|
4249 | % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
---|
4250 | % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
---|
4251 | % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer |
---|
4252 | % division. Hence the use of the counters. |
---|
4253 | % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will |
---|
4254 | % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result |
---|
4255 | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% |
---|
4256 | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% |
---|
4257 | % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by |
---|
4258 | % floating point values |
---|
4259 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
---|
4260 | \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
---|
4261 | % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter |
---|
4262 | % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the |
---|
4263 | % big letter. |
---|
4264 | \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
---|
4265 | % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter |
---|
4266 | % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the |
---|
4267 | % hanging indent |
---|
4268 | \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont |
---|
4269 | \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% |
---|
4270 | % end of the isolated calculation environment |
---|
4271 | % add in the extra clearance we want |
---|
4272 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% |
---|
4273 | % add in the optional offset |
---|
4274 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% |
---|
4275 | % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents |
---|
4276 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
---|
4277 | \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi |
---|
4278 | % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the |
---|
4279 | % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use |
---|
4280 | % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command |
---|
4281 | % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other |
---|
4282 | % text won't be displaced by it. |
---|
4283 | \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% |
---|
4284 | \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% |
---|
4285 | \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% |
---|
4286 | \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% |
---|
4287 | \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% |
---|
4288 | {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} |
---|
4289 | |
---|
4290 | |
---|
4291 | |
---|
4292 | |
---|
4293 | |
---|
4294 | |
---|
4295 | % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater |
---|
4296 | % than the specified space of argument one |
---|
4297 | % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) |
---|
4298 | % and issue a \newpage |
---|
4299 | % |
---|
4300 | % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} |
---|
4301 | % |
---|
4302 | % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to |
---|
4303 | % be overly cautious |
---|
4304 | % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau |
---|
4305 | % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, |
---|
4306 | % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine |
---|
4307 | % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead |
---|
4308 | \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable |
---|
4309 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left |
---|
4310 | \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left |
---|
4311 | \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% |
---|
4312 | \newpage% |
---|
4313 | \fi\endgroup} |
---|
4314 | |
---|
4315 | |
---|
4316 | |
---|
4317 | % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT |
---|
4318 | % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) |
---|
4319 | % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! |
---|
4320 | % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a |
---|
4321 | % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. |
---|
4322 | % MDS 7/2001 |
---|
4323 | % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries |
---|
4324 | \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade |
---|
4325 | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue |
---|
4326 | |
---|
4327 | % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies |
---|
4328 | % and not just the previous section |
---|
4329 | \newcounter{IEEEbiography} |
---|
4330 | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} |
---|
4331 | |
---|
4332 | % photo area size |
---|
4333 | \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area |
---|
4334 | \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area |
---|
4335 | % area cleared for photo |
---|
4336 | \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area |
---|
4337 | \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area |
---|
4338 | % actual depth will be a multiple of |
---|
4339 | % \baselineskip, rounded up |
---|
4340 | \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography |
---|
4341 | |
---|
4342 | \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% |
---|
4343 | \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% |
---|
4344 | % we need enough space to support the hanging indent |
---|
4345 | % the nominal value of the spacer |
---|
4346 | % and one extra line for good measure |
---|
4347 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
---|
4348 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% |
---|
4349 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% |
---|
4350 | % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
---|
4351 | % with a new one |
---|
4352 | \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% |
---|
4353 | % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill |
---|
4354 | \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
---|
4355 | % the default box for where the photo goes |
---|
4356 | \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% |
---|
4357 | \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% |
---|
4358 | % |
---|
4359 | % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the |
---|
4360 | % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above |
---|
4361 | % and if so, override the default box with what they want |
---|
4362 | \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% |
---|
4363 | \centering% |
---|
4364 | #1% |
---|
4365 | \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied |
---|
4366 | % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
---|
4367 | \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
---|
4368 | % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
---|
4369 | % to the biography, not the previous section |
---|
4370 | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
---|
4371 | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
---|
4372 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
---|
4373 | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
---|
4374 | \fi% |
---|
4375 | % one more biography |
---|
4376 | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
---|
4377 | % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
---|
4378 | \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% |
---|
4379 | % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the |
---|
4380 | % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so |
---|
4381 | % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the |
---|
4382 | % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. |
---|
4383 | \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command |
---|
4384 | \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par |
---|
4385 | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box |
---|
4386 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
---|
4387 | \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth |
---|
4388 | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth |
---|
4389 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate |
---|
4390 | % set the hanging indent |
---|
4391 | \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% |
---|
4392 | \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
---|
4393 | % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T |
---|
4394 | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% |
---|
4395 | % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything |
---|
4396 | \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% |
---|
4397 | \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% |
---|
4398 | % now place the author name and begin the bio text |
---|
4399 | \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% |
---|
4400 | % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area |
---|
4401 | % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry |
---|
4402 | % MDS |
---|
4403 | \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo |
---|
4404 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad |
---|
4405 | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line |
---|
4406 | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding |
---|
4407 | \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
---|
4408 | \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut |
---|
4409 | \fi% |
---|
4410 | \par\normalfont} |
---|
4411 | |
---|
4412 | |
---|
4413 | |
---|
4414 | % V1.6 |
---|
4415 | % added biography without a photo environment |
---|
4416 | \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% |
---|
4417 | % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
---|
4418 | \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
---|
4419 | % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
---|
4420 | % to the biography, not the previous section |
---|
4421 | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
---|
4422 | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
---|
4423 | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
---|
4424 | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
---|
4425 | \fi% |
---|
4426 | % one more biography |
---|
4427 | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
---|
4428 | % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
---|
4429 | \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% |
---|
4430 | \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% |
---|
4431 | \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
---|
4432 | \parskip=0pt\par% |
---|
4433 | \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} |
---|
4434 | |
---|
4435 | |
---|
4436 | % provide the user with some old font commands |
---|
4437 | % got this from article.cls |
---|
4438 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} |
---|
4439 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} |
---|
4440 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} |
---|
4441 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} |
---|
4442 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} |
---|
4443 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} |
---|
4444 | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} |
---|
4445 | \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} |
---|
4446 | \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} |
---|
4447 | |
---|
4448 | |
---|
4449 | % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS |
---|
4450 | % |
---|
4451 | % holds the special notice text |
---|
4452 | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} |
---|
4453 | |
---|
4454 | % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: |
---|
4455 | % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle |
---|
4456 | \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
---|
4457 | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% |
---|
4458 | \else% |
---|
4459 | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% |
---|
4460 | \fi} |
---|
4461 | |
---|
4462 | |
---|
4463 | |
---|
4464 | |
---|
4465 | % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS |
---|
4466 | % to insert a publisher's ID footer |
---|
4467 | % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style |
---|
4468 | % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle |
---|
4469 | % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page |
---|
4470 | % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into |
---|
4471 | % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author |
---|
4472 | % names and the maintext. |
---|
4473 | % |
---|
4474 | % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the |
---|
4475 | % publisher's ID footer |
---|
4476 | % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, |
---|
4477 | % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction |
---|
4478 | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} |
---|
4479 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
---|
4480 | % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no |
---|
4481 | % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the |
---|
4482 | % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the |
---|
4483 | % second column |
---|
4484 | % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on |
---|
4485 | % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for |
---|
4486 | % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip |
---|
4487 | % and call it even. |
---|
4488 | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} |
---|
4489 | \fi |
---|
4490 | |
---|
4491 | % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup |
---|
4492 | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
---|
4493 | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} |
---|
4494 | \fi |
---|
4495 | |
---|
4496 | % holds the ID text |
---|
4497 | \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} |
---|
4498 | |
---|
4499 | % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called |
---|
4500 | \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid |
---|
4501 | \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse |
---|
4502 | % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom |
---|
4503 | % V1.6 use before \maketitle |
---|
4504 | \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} |
---|
4505 | |
---|
4506 | |
---|
4507 | % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in |
---|
4508 | % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of |
---|
4509 | % the title page when using \IEEEpubid |
---|
4510 | % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or |
---|
4511 | % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid |
---|
4512 | % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the |
---|
4513 | % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this |
---|
4514 | % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility |
---|
4515 | % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been |
---|
4516 | % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. |
---|
4517 | % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc |
---|
4518 | \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
---|
4519 | \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
---|
4520 | |
---|
4521 | % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other |
---|
4522 | % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to |
---|
4523 | % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. |
---|
4524 | |
---|
4525 | |
---|
4526 | |
---|
4527 | %% Lockout some commands under various conditions |
---|
4528 | |
---|
4529 | % general purpose bit bucket |
---|
4530 | \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} |
---|
4531 | |
---|
4532 | % flags to prevent multiple warning messages |
---|
4533 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks |
---|
4534 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart |
---|
4535 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography |
---|
4536 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto |
---|
4537 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid |
---|
4538 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol |
---|
4539 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership |
---|
4540 | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext |
---|
4541 | \@IEEEWARNthankstrue |
---|
4542 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue |
---|
4543 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue |
---|
4544 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue |
---|
4545 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue |
---|
4546 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue |
---|
4547 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue |
---|
4548 | \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue |
---|
4549 | |
---|
4550 | |
---|
4551 | %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed |
---|
4552 | %% |
---|
4553 | % save commands which might be locked out |
---|
4554 | % so that the user can later restore them if needed |
---|
4555 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks |
---|
4556 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart |
---|
4557 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography |
---|
4558 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography |
---|
4559 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto |
---|
4560 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto |
---|
4561 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid |
---|
4562 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol |
---|
4563 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership |
---|
4564 | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext |
---|
4565 | |
---|
4566 | |
---|
4567 | % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode |
---|
4568 | % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter |
---|
4569 | % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch |
---|
4570 | % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft |
---|
4571 | % paper. |
---|
4572 | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
---|
4573 | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
---|
4574 | is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
---|
4575 | \fi |
---|
4576 | % and for technotes |
---|
4577 | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
---|
4578 | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
---|
4579 | is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
---|
4580 | \fi |
---|
4581 | |
---|
4582 | |
---|
4583 | % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode |
---|
4584 | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
---|
4585 | % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, |
---|
4586 | % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. |
---|
4587 | % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead |
---|
4588 | % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen |
---|
4589 | % from filling up with redundant messages |
---|
4590 | \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks |
---|
4591 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} |
---|
4592 | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
---|
4593 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
---|
4594 | |
---|
4595 | |
---|
4596 | % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. |
---|
4597 | % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname |
---|
4598 | % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) |
---|
4599 | % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine |
---|
4600 | % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the |
---|
4601 | % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command |
---|
4602 | % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX |
---|
4603 | % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. |
---|
4604 | % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal |
---|
4605 | % name can be left undisturbed. |
---|
4606 | \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography |
---|
4607 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% |
---|
4608 | \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
---|
4609 | % and make biography point to our bogus biography |
---|
4610 | \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography |
---|
4611 | \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography |
---|
4612 | |
---|
4613 | \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto |
---|
4614 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% |
---|
4615 | \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
---|
4616 | |
---|
4617 | \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid |
---|
4618 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} |
---|
4619 | \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol |
---|
4620 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} |
---|
4621 | \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership |
---|
4622 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} |
---|
4623 | \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext |
---|
4624 | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} |
---|
4625 | \fi |
---|
4626 | |
---|
4627 | |
---|
4628 | % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out |
---|
4629 | \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% |
---|
4630 | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
---|
4631 | \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% |
---|
4632 | \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% |
---|
4633 | \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% |
---|
4634 | \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% |
---|
4635 | \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% |
---|
4636 | \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% |
---|
4637 | \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% |
---|
4638 | \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% |
---|
4639 | \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% |
---|
4640 | \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} |
---|
4641 | |
---|
4642 | |
---|
4643 | |
---|
4644 | % need a backslash character for typeout output |
---|
4645 | {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 |
---|
4646 | |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} |
---|
4647 | |
---|
4648 | |
---|
4649 | % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings |
---|
4650 | \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). |
---|
4651 | Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} |
---|
4652 | |
---|
4653 | |
---|
4654 | % provide for legacy commands |
---|
4655 | \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} |
---|
4656 | \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} |
---|
4657 | \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} |
---|
4658 | \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} |
---|
4659 | \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} |
---|
4660 | \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} |
---|
4661 | \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} |
---|
4662 | \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} |
---|
4663 | \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} |
---|
4664 | \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} |
---|
4665 | |
---|
4666 | |
---|
4667 | |
---|
4668 | % provide for legacy environments |
---|
4669 | \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} |
---|
4670 | \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} |
---|
4671 | \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} |
---|
4672 | \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} |
---|
4673 | \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} |
---|
4674 | \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} |
---|
4675 | |
---|
4676 | |
---|
4677 | % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible |
---|
4678 | \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent |
---|
4679 | \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} |
---|
4680 | \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} |
---|
4681 | \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} |
---|
4682 | \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} |
---|
4683 | \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} |
---|
4684 | \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} |
---|
4685 | |
---|
4686 | |
---|
4687 | |
---|
4688 | % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded |
---|
4689 | % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof |
---|
4690 | \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} |
---|
4691 | |
---|
4692 | % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. |
---|
4693 | \def\overrideIEEEmargins{% |
---|
4694 | \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
---|
4695 | \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} |
---|
4696 | |
---|
4697 | |
---|
4698 | \endinput |
---|
4699 | |
---|
4700 | %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
---|
4701 | % That's all folks! |
---|
4702 | |
---|